You are on page 1of 472

Welcome to Well-Insight™

Well-Insight™ Software is an advance petrophysical interpretation tool that allows users


to derive the maximum benefit from petrophysics interpretation.

Well-Insight™ is unique software is designed to handle various types of reservoir


including fractured granite basement, fractured sandstone, carbonate, low resistivity and
conventional clastic reservoir.

Well-Insight™ is developed by EastSea Star Ltd in Vietnam. Well-Insight’s technical


support is provided by EastSea Star Ltd (ESS). All support issues, bugs and technical
help should be referred to the users local ESS support desk
http://www.esstar.com.vn/index.php/contact-us/
Well InsightBenefits and Uses

Well Insight is the most effective petrophysical analysis tool for various types of
reservoir including fractured granite basement, fracture sandstone, carbonate and
conventional reservoir. Well Insight provides the petrophysicist with a highly visual, easy
to use technical environment, innovative workflow manager for multi-zone, multi-well
petrophysical analyses.

Typical Uses of Well-Insight™

Easy data import and export.

Increase productivity with workflow oriented and intuitive interface.

Overlay lines for granitoid rock types classification.

Robust multi mineral solver enables us to correct for most complicated lithology model.

Unique approach for facture porosity, permeability and water saturation estimation.

Easy to handle multi-zones, petrophysical multi-wells analysis.

Full uncertainty workflow for informed decision making.


Table of Contents
Part I: Getting Started with Well-Insight™ ............................................................................................. 1
Chapter 1: Getting Started with Well-Insight™ .................................................................................. 2
Getting Started ...................................................................................................................................... 2
Quick-Start Guide to Well-Insight™ .................................................................................................... 2
The Well-Insight™ User Interface........................................................................................................ 3
Part II: Setting Up a Project ...................................................................................................................... 9
Chapter 2: Setting Up a Project............................................................................................................. 9
Creating a Project .................................................................................................................................. 9
Opening an Existing Project ............................................................................................................... 10
Saving Project ..................................................................................................................................... 11
Closing a Project ................................................................................................................................. 11
Part III: Wells Management .................................................................................................................... 13
Chapter 3: Wells ................................................................................................................................... 14
Create new well................................................................................................................................... 14
Save Well ............................................................................................................................................ 15
Delete Well ......................................................................................................................................... 15
Well Header ........................................................................................................................................ 15
Depth Conversion ............................................................................................................................... 16
Chapter 4: Data Import........................................................................................................................ 22
Import ASCII ...................................................................................................................................... 22
Import Multi ASCII ............................................................................................................................ 24
Import LAS ......................................................................................................................................... 26
Import Multi LAS ............................................................................................................................... 29
Interval/CoreLoader ............................................................................................................................ 31
Multi Well Core Loader ...................................................................................................................... 35
Import Input Curve ............................................................................................................................. 43
Import Input Fluid ............................................................................................................................... 45
Import Mineral Zones ......................................................................................................................... 48
Chapter 5: Data Export ........................................................................................................................ 49
Export ASCII ...................................................................................................................................... 49
Export Multi ASCII ............................................................................................................................ 51
Export LAS ......................................................................................................................................... 54
Export Multi LAS ............................................................................................................................... 57
Export Core Data ................................................................................................................................ 59
Export Well Header ............................................................................................................................ 62
Export Curve Parameters .................................................................................................................... 64
Export Fluid Parameters...................................................................................................................... 65
Export Mineral Model Parameters ...................................................................................................... 67
Part IV: Data Analysis.............................................................................................................................. 70
Chapter 6: Log plot............................................................................................................................... 71
Log Plot Interface ............................................................................................................................... 71
The Plot Window ................................................................................................................................ 71
Menu icons on Log plot ...................................................................................................................... 72
Screen Navigation and Sizing ............................................................................................................. 75
Reference Track .................................................................................................................................. 77
Depth Track ........................................................................................................................................ 79
Linear Track ........................................................................................................................................ 82
Logarithmic Track .............................................................................................................................. 84
Zonation Track .................................................................................................................................... 87
How to View Curve on Log Plot ........................................................................................................ 89
Curve Properties.................................................................................................................................. 89
Add Marker ......................................................................................................................................... 92
Add Annotation ................................................................................................................................... 93
Add Image ........................................................................................................................................... 94
Create Shading .................................................................................................................................... 95
Chapter 7: Cross plot............................................................................................................................ 99
Cross Plot Interface ............................................................................................................................. 99
Cross Plot Window ........................................................................................................................... 100
Menu Icons on Cross Plot ................................................................................................................. 100
Crossplot Format ............................................................................................................................... 101
Active Zone ....................................................................................................................................... 108
Crossplot Frequency Info .................................................................................................................. 108
Functions ........................................................................................................................................... 110
Pickett Plot ........................................................................................................................................ 110
Chapter 8: Histogram ......................................................................................................................... 114
Introduction to Histogram ................................................................................................................. 114
Statistics ............................................................................................................................................ 115
Histogram Edit Format...................................................................................................................... 117
Histogram Active Zone ..................................................................................................................... 121
Histogram Frequency Info ................................................................................................................ 121
PART V: Data Processing ...................................................................................................................... 123
Chapter 9: Data Editing ..................................................................................................................... 124
Add New Curves ............................................................................................................................... 124
Curve Listing Edit ............................................................................................................................. 124
Edit Curve ......................................................................................................................................... 126
Baseline Shift .................................................................................................................................... 127
Merge Curves .................................................................................................................................... 130
Split Curve ........................................................................................................................................ 132
Curve Header .................................................................................................................................... 133
Fill Data Gaps ................................................................................................................................... 134
Curve Rescale ................................................................................................................................... 136
Curve Filter ....................................................................................................................................... 137
Curve Convolution ............................................................................................................................ 139
Curve Deconvolution ........................................................................................................................ 142
Curve Derivative ............................................................................................................................... 145
Curve Average .................................................................................................................................. 148
Curve Comparison ............................................................................................................................ 150
Formation Resistivity ........................................................................................................................ 152
Bad hole/Coal/Salt ............................................................................................................................ 154
Chapter 10: User Formulas ................................................................................................................ 158
User Formula .................................................................................................................................... 158
User Program .................................................................................................................................... 160
API Functions ................................................................................................................................... 164
Get All Wells ................................................................................................................................ 165
Get All Wells By Group................................................................................................................ 166
Get All Datasets ............................................................................................................................ 167
Check Exist Dataset ...................................................................................................................... 168
Create Dataset ............................................................................................................................... 169
Delete Dataset ............................................................................................................................... 171
Get All Curves .............................................................................................................................. 172
Get All Curves By Alias ............................................................................................................... 173
Create Blank Curve ....................................................................................................................... 174
Save Curve .................................................................................................................................... 175
Delete Curve ................................................................................................................................. 177
Check Exist Curve ........................................................................................................................ 178
Load Curve.................................................................................................................................... 180
Set Alias ........................................................................................................................................ 181
Copy Family.................................................................................................................................. 182
Get Well Information To Array .................................................................................................... 184
Get Well Information To Key ....................................................................................................... 185
Get Well Information To Object ................................................................................................... 186
Get All ZoneSets ........................................................................................................................... 188
Get All Zones ................................................................................................................................ 189
Depth to Index............................................................................................................................... 191
Export Single Well Data Ascii ...................................................................................................... 192
Export Single Well Data Csv ........................................................................................................ 194
Export Multi Well Data Ascii ....................................................................................................... 195
Export Multi Well Data Csv ......................................................................................................... 197
WICurve properties ....................................................................................................................... 198
Chapter 11: Calculation ..................................................................................................................... 200
TVD Conversion ............................................................................................................................... 200
Multiple Linear Regression............................................................................................................... 202
Neural Network ................................................................................................................................. 208
Part VI: Petrophysics ............................................................................................................................. 214
Chapter 12: Introduction to Petrophysics ........................................................................................ 214
Creating Interpretation Model ........................................................................................................... 215
Symbol List ....................................................................................................................................... 216
Part VII: Fracture Basement ................................................................................................................. 219
Chapter 13: Fracture Basement ........................................................................................................ 222
How to open Fracture Basement Reservoir Workflow ..................................................................... 223
Define Interpretation Interval............................................................................................................ 224
Zone Management ............................................................................................................................ 225
Input Curve ....................................................................................................................................... 227
Input Fluid......................................................................................................................................... 229
Input Mineral Model ......................................................................................................................... 230
Build Mineral Parameter ................................................................................................................... 231
Block Value ...................................................................................................................................... 241
Secondary Porosity ........................................................................................................................... 247
Fracture Porosity ............................................................................................................................... 248
Filtering Fracture Type Porosity ....................................................................................................... 251
Micro and Macro Porosity ................................................................................................................ 253
Water Saturation ............................................................................................................................... 254
Calculate Permeability ...................................................................................................................... 256
Calculate Synthetic Curves Quality .................................................................................................. 258
Calculate Error Evaluation ................................................................................................................ 259
Cutoff and Summation ...................................................................................................................... 260
Part VIII: Fracture Clastic (Tight Sandstone) ..................................................................................... 264
Chapter 14: Fracture Clastic ............................................................................................................. 267
How to open Fracture Clastic Reservoir Workflow .......................................................................... 267
Define Interpretation Interval............................................................................................................ 268
Zone Management ............................................................................................................................ 269
Input Curve ....................................................................................................................................... 271
Input Fluid......................................................................................................................................... 273
Input Mineral Model ......................................................................................................................... 274
Build Mineral Parameter ................................................................................................................... 275
Multi – Minerals Solver .................................................................................................................... 277
Mineral Distribution of Sands and Shales......................................................................................... 279
Block Porosity................................................................................................................................... 282
Fracture - Vug Porosity ..................................................................................................................... 283
Open Porosity.................................................................................................................................... 284
Calculate Water Saturation ............................................................................................................... 285
Filtering ............................................................................................................................................. 286
Calculate Synthetic Curves Quality .................................................................................................. 288
Calculate Error Evaluation ................................................................................................................ 290
Cutoff and Summation ...................................................................................................................... 291
Part IX: Clastic ....................................................................................................................................... 294
Chapter 15: Clastic ............................................................................................................................. 295
Input Parameters ............................................................................................................................... 296
Define Interpretation Interval........................................................................................................ 296
Zone Management ........................................................................................................................ 297
Quick Look ....................................................................................................................................... 300
Basic Analysis ............................................................................................................................... 300
Clay volume ...................................................................................................................................... 309
VSH from Gamma Ray ................................................................................................................. 309
VSH from Thermal Neutron ......................................................................................................... 314
VSH from Resistivity .................................................................................................................... 318
VSH from Spontaneous potential ................................................................................................. 323
VSH from Neutron-Density .......................................................................................................... 327
VSH from Density-Sonic .............................................................................................................. 332
VSH from Neutron-Sonic ............................................................................................................. 337
Final Clay Volume ........................................................................................................................ 342
Porosity ............................................................................................................................................ 347
Total and Effective Porosity from Density ................................................................................... 347
Total and Effective Porosity from Neutron ................................................................................... 350
Total and Effective porosity from Sonic ....................................................................................... 353
Total and Effective Porosity from Density-Neutron ..................................................................... 358
Total and Effective Porosity from Neutron-Sonic ........................................................................ 363
Final Porosity ................................................................................................................................ 369
The Hydrocarbon Correction ........................................................................................................ 372
Utilities.............................................................................................................................................. 376
Temperature .................................................................................................................................. 376
Formation Resistivity .................................................................................................................... 380
Multi Mineral Solver..................................................................................................................... 383
Thin Bed Analysis......................................................................................................................... 392
Water Saturation ............................................................................................................................... 405
Archie............................................................................................................................................ 405
Simandoux .................................................................................................................................... 406
Dual Water .................................................................................................................................... 408
Juhasz ............................................................................................................................................ 409
Indonesia ....................................................................................................................................... 411
Waxman-Smits .............................................................................................................................. 412
Modified Indonesia ....................................................................................................................... 413
Modified Simandoux .................................................................................................................... 415
Cutoff and Summation ...................................................................................................................... 422
Cutoff and Summation Report ...................................................................................................... 422
Part X: Capillary Pressure Modeling.................................................................................................... 430
Chapter 16: Capillary Pressure Modeling ........................................................................................ 431
Create New Capillary Pressure Workflow ........................................................................................ 432
Input Settings .................................................................................................................................... 433
Data Loader....................................................................................................................................... 434
Data Correction and Transformation ................................................................................................ 436
Build Capillary Pressure Models ...................................................................................................... 439
J Leverett Model ........................................................................................................................... 441
J Leverett Modified Model ........................................................................................................... 445
Corey-Brooks Model .................................................................................................................... 449
Thomeer Model ............................................................................................................................. 453
Saturation Height Modeling .............................................................................................................. 457
Part I: Getting Started with Well-Insight™

1|Page
Chapter 1: Getting Started with Well-Insight™

Getting Started
This chapter explains how to start using Well Insight software and describes the Well
Insight basic functionality.

This chapter covers the following topics:

 A quick-start guide to the Well Insight user interface


 Starting Well Insight session, including loading the demonstration data
 A description of the user interface and the data structure
 A brief description of the Viewer
 Using the dialog box in Well Insight

Quick-Start Guide to Well-Insight™


Install Well Insight on your system. Having a look around, the user interface and follow
these steps to get familiar with the application:

1. Start Well Insight


- Start Well Insight just like any other application on your system. The
easiest way is to double-click the Insight icon on your desktop.
- When the Well Insight window opens, it will look similar to Figure below.
- Well Insight will open the last project opened (if any).

2|Page
2. Load the example project
- Click the Open Project icon, and navigate to the location of the demo
project.

The Well-Insight™ User Interface


Interface Basics Well Insight consists of the following components, described in detail
in the sections that follow:

 A menu bar for accessing general commands


 Tear-off Panes:
- Project browser – Lists all project data in hierarchical Data tree
- Workflow panes– Lists all workflows of jobs and provides predefined
templates
- Views-Provides an overview of all views shown in

The Menu Bar

3|Page
The Well Insight menu bar is located at the top of the window. Click a menu name with
the left mouse button to display the sub menu.

Tear-off Panes

The panes in Well Insight can be moved around freely according to the template shown
in the Figure below. If more than one pane is put in the same location, the panes are
placed on top of each other and tabs will be shown.

To bring a hidden pane to the front, click the associated icon button on the toolbar. If data
extends beyond the visible area, you can move it into view using the scroll bars. The pane
remains open until you close the window. The dashed double line, called a “handle”, at
the top of the pane indicates that the pane can be “torn off”, opening a separate window
that can be placed somewhere else on the screen.

Grab the handle of the Data pane and drag the pane to another place on the screen. Now,
try to reattach it to the RMS window. Take another look at to see the possible locations
for docking a pane. The toolbars can be moved to any of the light grey areas. Note that
they are all central around the Viewer. Double-click the header of the detached toolbar.
See that it automatically reattaches itself to the main window in the last docked location.
Be aware, that it could cause the other pane to be hidden. If this occurs, looking for tabs
under the pane and click the tab that is not active. Now, you will see the hidden pane.

4|Page
Project Browser

The ‘Project Browser’ functionality allows the user to interrogate an WI project in a


graphical tree view interface. The view is hierarchical, similar to a typical WINDOW
browser.

The Project Browse displays all the data in the project in a set of hierarchical folders.
Similar or related data is grouped together in one of several main folders. These main
folders can contain subfolders. Where the details for each type of data are stored. The
project browser is initially divided into four areas: Wells, Markers, Multi wells Logplots,
Multi wells CrossPlots and Multi wells Histograms (Figure 2.5) for an example
configuration of the Project browser.

The project browsers allow the user to apply numerous actions at:

 The well level

5|Page
 The dataset level
 The interpretation model level
 The user define level
 The variable level

6|Page
7|Page
The Workflow Panes

The Workflows pane is displayed when you right click the specific interpretation model
under interpretation model folder (Figure 2.6).

8|Page
Part II: Setting Up a Project

Chapter 2: Setting Up a Project


This chapter explains how to set up a project and provides an overview of how to
manage your project data. It covers the following topics:

 Creating a project
 Opening an existing project
 Saving a project
 Closing a project

Creating a Project
To create a new project:

1. Go to Project menu > New project.


2. In the New Project form, Project Name, Location, Company, Department,
Description step, define:
- The project name (avoid using “\”, “ “).
- The location to save the data as a new file set. Press Browse button to give
the directory to save project.
- (optional) Define a Company for the project.
- (optional) Define a Department for the project.
- (optional) Fill the description window with a comment about the project.
3. Click on the OK button to finalize the creation of the project.

9|Page
Opening an Existing Project
To open an existing project:

1. Go to Project menu > Open project.


2. The Open Project window shows up.
3. Press Browse to select the project to open.

10 | P a g e
Saving Project
The project is automatically saved.

Closing a Project
To close the project:

1. Go to Project menu > Close project.

11 | P a g e
12 | P a g e
Part III: Wells Management
The first stage in setting up a project, before you can interpret petrophysics, is to import
your interpreted data into Well Insight.

This part explains how to create new well and bring your source data into Well Insight
project. It describes procedures for importing LAS data, ASCII data, CSV data, Core
data, Well Top, Well Header …

13 | P a g e
Chapter 3: Wells

Create new well


To add new well:

1. Go to Wells menu > Add New > The Create new well form is displayed. This
allows the user to set the well name, depth interval and unit for the well.

2. In the Create New Well form, Well Name, Top Depth, Bottom Depth, Step
define:
- Well name: define the name of well.
- Top Depth, Bottom Depth and Step are optional. If the Top Depth, Bottom
Depth and Step are left blank then the well will be taken from the first data
file (LAS, ASCII,..) loaded into the well.
3. Click on the OK button to finalize the creation of the well.
4. Observe on data tree, there is new well is created under Wells folder.

14 | P a g e
Save Well
Well is automatically saved in project data

Delete Well
To delete well

1. Select well you want to delete > Wells menu > Press Delete Well icon.
2. Data tree > Highlight on any wells you want to delete > Press Delete icon on
Project browser.

Well Header
WI provides “Well Header” feature in order to help users to view and edit header
information of wells.

To edit header information of wells:

1. Go to Well > Well Header. Well Header form is displayed.

2. Choose well from Well Name list.

15 | P a g e
3. Manually input data into available fields.
4. Click Apply & OK to save new header information. Click Close to close Well
Header form.

Depth Conversion
To convert depths for a well:

1. Go to Well > Depth Conversion. Depth Conversion form is displayed.


2. Select well: users choose well want to convert depth.
 Original Depths area: show original depths from selected well, consist of well
Step, Top Depth and Bottom Depth.

3. Input new depths:


 New Depths area: allows users to manually input well step (0.0001 – well
depth), Top Depth and Bottom Depth, (0.0001 < Top Depth < Bottom
depth)

16 | P a g e
 Fixed Top: Check it to keep exactly Top Depth of selected well, Bottom
Depth may be changed slightly according to the well step.
 Fixed Bottom: Check it to keep exactly Bottom Depth of selected well, Top
Depth may be changed slightly according to the well step.
4. After finish settings, Users click:
 Run to start covert depth process.
 Close to close Depth Conversion form.

Curve Alias

In Well Insight, users can manually assign alias for curves for further management. It is
more convenient in multiple well processing, when users have different curve names in a
curve family (e.g. GR, EGR, ECGR in Gamma Ray curve family) in numerous wells,
assigning an alias (e.g. GR) for these Gamma Ray curve so that they can be displayed
with same alias “GR”.

To assign alias for curves:

1. Go to Well > Curve Alias. Curve Alias form is displayed.

17 | P a g e
2. Alias by:
 None: leave alias empty
 Curve name: assign alias for each curve name. WI also provide search
feature for easier finding curve name to assign alias.
 Family name: assign alias for each family name.

To use search option, users choose Alias by Curve name then check in “Use Search
Option”, Curve Search Conditions area is displayed.

How to assign alias for curves in specific wells:

18 | P a g e
3. Manually inputting alias: choose Alias by Curve name or Family name, input
alias for each curve or curve family, click Apply and OK.

4. Assign alias by using search option for Curve name.

19 | P a g e
Curve search conditions:

 Name is equal to: search results have to exactly match with search key
words.
 Name is like: users can use mask (*, +, ?) in search key words. For
example: *Rh+.
o *: represents for zero, one or several variable letters.
o +: represents for one or several variable letters.
o ? : represents for one variable letter.
 Name contains: search results have to contain letters in search key words.

20 | P a g e
 Family name: check it, select one curve family name in the list to include
as a search condition.

21 | P a g e
Chapter 4: Data Import
Before you can start your petrophysical interpretation, you need to load or import your
source data into Well Insight.

 Import ASCII
 Import Multi ASCII
 Import LAS file
 Import Multi LAS
 Interval/Core Loader
 Multi-Well Core Loader
 Import Well Header
 Import Well Top
 Dialog box table import – import tables directly to the Well Insight dialog boxed

Import ASCII
To import ASCII file:

1. Go to Menu bar > Wells > Import > Select Import ASCII.
2. Load ASCII file form is displayed

22 | P a g e
Explanation of components in Multi ASCII Export form

 BB Browse button: use to open file explorer to locate files to load.


 Well: use to select the well to load ASCII to the project.

 Dataset: user can choose existed Data Set or use to create a new one.
 Top Depth, Bottom Depth, Step: information of the selected well.
 Column format: users have to choose appropriate format of ASCII file (the arrangement of
columns) for correctly import.
o Depth, Curves: 1st column is Depth, Curves are from the 2nd one.
o Well, Depth, Curves: 1st column is Well name, 2nd is Depth, Curves are from the 3rd
column.
o UWI, Depth, Curves: 1st column is UWI, 2nd is Depth, Curves are from the 3rd column.
o Well, UWI, Depth, Curves: 1st column is Well name, 2nd is UWI, 3rd is Depth, Curves
are from the 4th column.
 Curve name start at: starting row of curve unit in ASCII file, default is: 2.

23 | P a g e
 Curve unit start at: starting row of curve name in ASCII file, default is: 3.
 Curve data start at: starting row of curve data in ASCII file, default is: 4.
 Depth Unit: users can choose Meters or Feet for Depth Unit.
 Preview row: users can manually enter the number of rows they want to view.

After finish choosing file and setting, click “Load” to load file and “Close” to close ASCII Loader form.

Import Multi ASCII


In Well Insight (WI), users are also provided option to load multi ASCII files for multiple wells project.

To import multi ASCII files:

1. Go to Menu bar > Wells > Import > Select Import Multi ASCII.
2. Batch ASCII import form is displayed.

Explanation of components in Multi ASCII import form

In Settings tab, WI allows the users to select several options before choosing files to load into Well
Insight:

 Curve name start at: start row of curve unit in ASCII files, default is 2.
 Curve unit start at: start row of curve name in ASCII files, default is 3.

24 | P a g e
 Curve data start at: start row of curve data in ASCII files, default is 4.
 Column format: users have to choose appropriate format of ASCII file (the arrangement of
columns) for correctly import.
o Depth, Curves: 1st column is Depth, Curves are from the 2nd one.
o Well, Depth, Curves: 1st column is Well name, 2nd is Depth, Curves are from the 3rd
column.
o UWI, Depth, Curves: 1st column is UWI, 2nd is Depth, Curves are from the 3rd column.
o Well, UWI, Depth, Curves: 1st column is Well name, 2nd is UWI, 3rd is Depth, Curves
are from the 4th column.
 Create new Well if duplicated: WI will automatically create new wells from loading ASCII
files if these well are existed in the project. New created wells will be named automatically
“WELLNAME”_1, “WELLNAME”_2….
 Create new Data Set if duplicated: WI will automatically create new Data Set for existed or
opted well if there is the same Data Set name in loading ASCII files.

User are allowed to load all curves or manually choose specific curves by selecting “Load all
Curves” or “Choose Families” options.

In Input Files tab, WI provides users option to choose files to load.

25 | P a g e
 Select files button: allow users to choose several files from different locations. Selected files
will be listed in the windows.
 Users are allowed to remove one, some or all the selected files by using “Remove” or
“Clear” button.

In Input Files Table:

 Load column: by default, all selected wells will be checked. Users can manually uncheck
well name they do not want to load.
 File Name column: name of selected ASCII files
 Well name column: by default, WI will automatically create new wells. User can manually
opt to load selected ASCII file to specific well by using combo box. All existed wells will be
listed in this box.
 Data Set column: by default, WI will create one Data Set named “Data_Input” for each well.
Users are also allowed to name the Data Set manually.

In Preview area:

WI will show some basic information about the well in selected ASCII file, consists of Input
Name, Unit

After finish setting and choosing ASCII files,

 Press “Load” button to load these files in to the project.


 Press “Stop” button to halt the loading process.
 Press “Close” button to close the window.

Import LAS

To import LAS file:

1. Go to Menu bar > Wells > Import > Select Import LAS.
2. Into Load LAS file form.
 Select button: to load the source file. The selected LAS format file will be
loaded into the interface shown below.

26 | P a g e
The Load LAS File window is displayed. The interface allows the users to select the
curves to load into Well Insight.
- The selected file name is displayed in Select file area.
- LAS Name column: lists all the curve names in the selected LAS file. User
cannot edit curve names in LAS Name column.
- Input Name column: is the name of curves in Well Insight. Allows the user to
edit manually by typing in new text.
- Unit column: displays the unit of curves from selected LAS file. You may
manually change the curve ‘Units” by typing new text.
- Load column: by default, on loading a new LAS file into the interface, all curve
rows have the “Load column” checked, which flags these curves to be loaded
into Well Insight. You can manually ‘un-check’ curve name you do not wish to
load.
- All button: if you want to select all curves to be imported, you press ‘All’
button.

27 | P a g e
- Invert button: swap selected and unselected curves by pressing the ‘Invert’
button.
- Well area:
 Select Well: the selected well entry box allows the user to select the desired
well from the list of wells to contain the imported LAS file. If users do not select
the existed well, Well Insight automatically creates new well that has the name is
LAS file name.
 Top Depth, Bottom Depth and Well step will display the values from
source LAS file.
 Dataset Name: The Dataset Name entry box allows the users to select the
desired dataset folder from lists to contain the curve names. If users do not select
the existed dataset, Well Insight automatically creates new dataset folder which
name is same as selected LAS name. You can manually change the dataset name
by typing new text.
- LAS File area:
 Step, Top Depth, Bottom Depth and Depth Unit display the values of
step, top depth, bottom depth and depth unit of well in the selected LAS file.
- LAS Input area:
 Step: display the well step of selected LAS file. It is grey out so you cannot
edit.
 Top Depth and Bottom Depth: allows the user to define their wish
interval depth.
 Depth Unit: the user can select meter or feet.
3. Click Load
Selected curve name from Load LAS file form will be imported to the selected
dataset name and selected well name.
4. Click Close to close the Load LAS file form.

Overwriting Existing Curves in Well Insight

28 | P a g e
They will be prompted that ‘Curve AAA’ will be replace by new data.

Import Multi LAS


In Well Insight (WI), users are also provided option to load multi LAS files for multiple wells project.

To import multi LAS files:

3. Go to Menu bar > Wells > Import > Select Import Multi LAS.
4. The Batch LAS import form is displayed.

Explanation of components in Batch LAS import form

5. In Settings tab, WI allows the users to select several options before choosing files to load into
Well Insight:
 Overwrite Well Header: WI will automatically overwrite well header if these wells are
existed in the project.
 Create new Well if duplicated: WI will automatically create new wells from loading LAS
files if these well are existed in the project. New created wells will be named automatically
“WELLNAME”_1, “WELLNAME”_2….

29 | P a g e
 Create new Data Set if duplicated: WI will automatically create new Data Set for existed or
opted well if there is the same Data Set name in loading LAS files.
 Use UWI as well name: check it to use UWI as well name.

User are allowed to load all curves or manually choose specific curves by selecting “Load all
Curves” or “Choose Families” options.

6. In Input Files tab, WI provides users option to choose files to load.

 Select files button: allow users to choose several files from different locations. Selected files
will be listed in the windows.
 Users are allowed to remove one, some or all the selected files by using “Remove” or
“Clear” button.

In input files table:

 Load column: by default, all selected las files will be checked. Users can manually uncheck
files they do not want to load.
 Well name column: by default, WI will automatically create new wells. User can manually
opt to load selected LAS file to specific well by using combo box in the column. All existed
wells will be listed in this box.

30 | P a g e
 Data Set column: by default, WI will create one Data Set named “Data_Input” for each well.
Users are also allowed to name the Data Set manually.

In Preview area:

WI will show some basic information about the well in selected LAS file, consists of Curve
name, unit, Step, Top Depth, Bottom depth, Depth Unit.

7. After finish setting and choosing LAS files,


 Press “Load” button to load these files in to the project.
 Press “Stop” button to halt the loading process.
 Press “Close” button to close the window.

Interval/CoreLoader
The ‘Interval Loader’ module allows the user to load data into Well Insight software
such as a facies-type interpretation, where a certain geological facies, represented by a
numerical value, is assigned over a particular depth interval. The “Interval Loader” also
is used to load periodic/discrete data, such as core plug analysis results (grain densities,
porosities and air permeability, water saturation) or wireline formation tester (RFT, RCI,
FMT) pressure data.

This module is very useful if the external data is presented in a spreadsheet form. The
'copy from spreadsheet' functionality can be utilized to load a large amounts of
spreadsheet data into the Well Insight interface.

To open Interval Loader form:

1. Go to Menu bar > Wells > Import > Select Interval/Core Loader.
2. Into Interval Loader form.

31 | P a g e
- The user can manually type values into the empty data table.
- Load values from ASCII data file (*.txt) or excel file (*.csv).
 Click the “Browse” button to launch an “Open” dialog and browse to
ASCII file or excel file.
 If the ASCII file or excel file has been set up with a top and bottom
depth then leave the ‘No Bottom Depth’ box ‘un-checked’. However if
the selected file has only one depth column then check the ‘No Bottom
Depth’ box.

32 | P a g e
 The format of the ASCII input file should be a series of data lines with a
'Top Depth' entry, and / or a 'Bottom Depth' entry and then data values
separated by spaces, tabs or commas. The 'Interval Loader' only reads
lines with numeric data entries. Curve names and curve units are
recognized or loaded. A minimum of three data columns must exist in
the input ASCII file. For core analysis data input or when loading RFT
pressure data, for example, type in 'Bottom Depth' values that are equal
to the 'Top Depth' entries, followed by the Core porosities, air
permeability or pressure values.
 The data file should load into the interface.
- The ‘Header’ row of the ‘Interval Loader’ interface, with titles in cells with a
grey background color, are described below:

33 | P a g e
 The ‘Name’ row allows the user to set up curve names for each column
of data loaded into interface.
 The ‘Units’ row allows the user to set up curve units for each column of
data loaded into interface.
3. Data is also copied and pasted into the interface from external spreadsheet
- Select the data range in the spreadsheet to be copied and copy it (‘CTRL’ or
right click mouse button ‘Copy’) into the clipboard. NOTE: the ‘Copy/Paste’
functionality only works with continuous spreadsheet data range. Click on the
first cell on the ‘Interval Loader’ grid into which to start the ‘paste’ operation.
- ‘Click’ the ‘Paste’ icon button at the base of the window. DO NOT use the
‘paste’ function from the drop-down menu obtained by right mouse clicking on
a cell. This will only paste single value into the selected cell.

34 | P a g e
- If the ‘Delete Curves before write’ check box is checked. Well Insight will
clear an existing Well Insight curve of its data before writing newly imported
data to it. If this box is not ‘checked’ (the default setting), this allows the user to
append/concatenate new data to an existing curve in the database.
- Clicking the ‘Clear All’ button removes all data entries from the ‘Interval
Loader’ screen.
- The ‘Delete Row’ button allows the user to remove all data entries from a
selected row from within the ‘Interval Loader’ screen.
- The ‘Delete Column’ button allows the user to remove all data entries from a
selected column from within the ‘Interval Loader’ screen.
4. Click the ‘Load’ button to execute the ‘load’ operation for the data currently
visible in the interface.
5. Click the ‘Close’ button to close the Interval Loader form.

Multi Well Core Loader


To import multi well core data:

1. Go to Menu bar > Wells > Import > Select Multi-well Core loader
2. Multi-well core Loader form is displayed.

35 | P a g e
3. In Settings tab:
 Dataset name: users can name the Dataset manually, default name: “Core_data”.
 Create new Data Set if duplicated: WI will automatically create new Data Set if
there are same Data Sets in loading files.
 Null value: user can manually input Null value, default value is: -999.25.
 Ignore: WI will ignore loading if curve existed
 Overwrite existing curves: Overwrite existing curves by new ones.
 Create new curves: WI will automatically create new curves with named
Curvename_1, Curvename_2…, if there are existing curves.
 Load core data as continuous curves (Optional)

WI provides users three methods to interpolate data in case of continuous curves:

o Block Interpolation

36 | P a g e
o Linear Interpolation
o Geometric Interpolation

In Row Settings area:

 Curve name at: row number of curve name, default: 1.


 Curve unit at: row number of curve unit, default: 2 (only active when “Import
Unit” is checked).
 Curve data start at: row number at which curve data starts, default: 2.

In Column Settings area:

 Depth, Curves: 1st column is Depth, Curves are from the 2nd one.
 Well, Depth, Curves: 1st column is Well name, 2nd is Depth, Curves are from the
3rd column.
 UWI, Depth, Curves: 1st column is UWI, 2nd is Depth, Curves are from the 3rd
column.
 Well, UWI, Depth, Curves: 1st column is Well name, 2nd is UWI, 3rd is Depth,
Curves are from the 4th column.

In Input Files tab:

37 | P a g e
 Select Files button: click to locate the excel files (*.csv) to load. Selected files will
be listed in the main window.
 Remove button: click to remove selected files.
 Clear button: click to remove all files.

In Preview area:

 Well Name column: name of wells in selected excel file.


 Top Depth column: top depth of associated wells.
 Curve 1, Curve 2, Curve3…: name of curves in these wells.
4. Click “Load” to load these files into the project.
5. Click “Close” to close multi well Core loader form.

Import Well Header

WI provides users Import Well Header feature to import well header information from
files (*.csv).

38 | P a g e
To import Well Header:

1. Go to Menu bar > Wells > Import > Select Import Well Header
2. Import Well Header form is displayed.

3. Click Browse button: use to locate files to load

39 | P a g e
4. Define type of information column by using the first row in data sheet (e.g. Name,
Latitude, Longitude, Author, Bottom Depth, Company, Company Logo,
Completion Day, Coordinate System, Country, Date, Eastings (X), Elevation,
Elevation Datum, Northings (Y), Operator, SPUD Day, State, Status, Top Depth,
Total Depth, Unique Well Identifier and Zone).
 Create new well if not exist: to create new well for loading file.
 Override well header if exist: automatically overwrite well header if well
is existed.
 Remove button: use to remove entire rows.
 Clear button: use to clear all data.
5. Click Load to begin loading process, Close to close Import Well Header form.

Import Well Top

WI provides users Import Well Top feature to import wells markers from files (*.csv).

40 | P a g e
To import Well Header:

6. Go to Menu bar > Wells > Import > Select Import Well Top
7. Into Import Well Top form.

8. Click Browse button: use to locate files to load.

41 | P a g e
9. Define Input Type, WI supports Zone Properties File and Petrel Marker Table.
10. Map table: Define type of data for each column (e.g. Well, Surface, Marker
Depth).
 Remove button: click to remove selected rows.
 Clear button: click to remove all rows.
11. Check Create Zones if users want to create zones base on imported markers.
12. Click Load to begin loading process, Close to close Import Well Top form.

42 | P a g e
Import Input Curve
To import input curve:

43 | P a g e
1. Data tree > Wells > Specific Well > Interpretation Models > Specific
Interpretation Model > Right click and select Run workflow.
2. Press Input Curve to open Input Curve form.
3. Press ‘Import’ button to launch an “Open” dialog and browse to import file.
4. By the default, Well Insight asks the user “Do you want to overwrite the default
zone of input curve”? YES, the existing default zone will be replaced by new
default zone of imported file. If NO, the existing default zone is kept and FRP
ignores the default zone in imported file. The rest zones will be added normally.
User can see the list of imported zone on “Area of Interest” area.
5. FRP does not allow to saving the overlapped zones. Users have to edit the top
depth and bottom depth of overlapped zones by Zone Management form.
(Described Chapter, Input Curve).
6. Press ‘Apply’ button to save data.
7. Press ‘Close’ button to close Input Curve form.

44 | P a g e
Import Input Fluid
To import input fluid:

45 | P a g e
1. Data tree > Wells > Specific Well > Interpretation Models > Specific
Interpretation Model > Right click and select Run workflow.
2. Press ‘Input Fluid’ to open Input Fluid form.
3. Press ‘Import’ button to launch an “Open” dialog and browse to imported file
4. By the default, FRP asks the user “Do you want to overwrite the default zone of
input fluid”? YES, the existing default zone will be replaced by new default zone
of imported file. If NO, the existing default zone is kept and FRP ignores the
default zone in imported file. The rest zones will be added normally. The user can
see the list of imported zone on “Area of Interest” area.
5. FRP does not allow to saving the overlapped zones. Users have to edit the top
depth and bottom depth of overlapped zones by Zone Management form.
(Described Chapter, Input Fluid).
6. Press ‘Apply’ button to save data.
7. Press ‘Close’ button to close Input Fluid form.

46 | P a g e
47 | P a g e
Import Mineral Zones
To import input mineral zones:

1. Data tree > Wells > Specific Well > Interpretation Models > Specific
Interpretation Model > Right click and select Run workflow.
2. Press ‘Input Mineral Zone’ to open ‘Mineral Zone’ form.
3. Press ‘Import’ button to launch an “Open” dialog and browse to imported file
4. By the default, FRP asks the user “Do you want to overwrite the default zone”?
YES, the existing default zone will be replaced by new default zone of imported
file. If NO, the existing default zone is kept and FRP ignores the default zone in
imported file. The rest zones will be added normally. User can see the list of
imported zone on “Area of Interest” area.
5. FRP does not allow to saving the overlapped zones. Users have to edit the top
depth and bottom depth of overlapped zones by Zone Management form.
(Described Chapter, Mineral Zone).
6. Press ‘Apply’ button to save data.
7. Press ‘Close’ button to close Mineral Zone form.

48 | P a g e
Chapter 5: Data Export

Export ASCII
To export ASCII file:

49 | P a g e
1. Go to Menu bar > Wells > Export> Select Export ASCII. Export ASCII File
form is displayed.

2. Users choose well to export in Select Well combo box.

Explanation of components in Export ASCII File form

Basic Info: When users choose a well to export by using Select Well combo box, WI
will show some basic properties of selected well, consists of:

 Top Depth: top depth of selected well, users can manually change it.
 Well Step: step of selected well, unchangeable.
 Bottom Depth: bottom depth of selected well, users can manually change it.
 NULL Value: Users can manually input null value, default value is -999.25.
 Decimal: the number of decimal places of values in exported file, default is 4.

50 | P a g e
 Information: other information of selected well will be displayed in this area,
consists of: Well Name, Company, Date, API number, License number. Users
can manually edit these fields.
 Include Well Name: check it to add well name column in exported ASCII/CSV
file.
 Include UWI: check it to add Unique Well Identifier column in exported
ASCII/CSV file.

Available curves table: WI will show the information of curves in selected well consists
of: curve name, dataset which contains these curves and their unit.

3. Users select curves to export then click on select button to add them into
selected curves table, use order button to rearrange them.

Selected curves table: WI will show the information of selected curves in selected well
consists of: curve name, dataset which contains these curves and their unit.

4. After finish settings:

Users click:

 Save button to begin export process.


 Close button to close the ASCII Export form.

Export Multi ASCII


To export Multi ASCII files:

1. Go to Menu bar > Wells > Export> Select Export Multi ASCII>Multi ASCII
Export form is displayed.

51 | P a g e
Explanation of components in Multi ASCII Export form

Wells area:

 Export column: users are allowed to check specific wells to export or to check
All to select all wells.
 Well name column: name of listed wells.
 File name column: file name of associated well names.
 All curves: choose it to export all available curves in ASCII files.
 By Alias: choose it to display all available curves by Alias.
 By Family: choose it to display all available curves by Family.

52 | P a g e
 Select and Deselect button : Move curves from Available Aliases/Families
to Selected Aliases/Families and vice versa.

 Order Up and Down button : Move objects up or down in selected list.

Settings area:

 NULL Value: WI allows users to define Null Value manually, default is: -999.25.
 Decimal: WI allows users to define decimal places for values in export
ASCII/CSV files, default is: 4.
 File Prefix/Suffix: WI allows users to define Prefix/Suffix of export ASCII/CSV
files’ names.
 Overwrite Files: choose this to replace existing files in Export Folder by the
exported ones if they have the same name.

53 | P a g e
 Include Well Name: check it to add well name column in exported ASCII/CSV
file.
 Include UWI: check it to add Unique Well Identifier column in exported
ASCII/CSV file.
 Single file merging all wells: one file for all exported wells.
 One file for each well: one file for each well.
 Output filename (only activated when option “one file for each well” is
selected): enter desired name for export file.
2. Export Folder:
 Browse button: use to browse to the Export Folder.
3. After finish settings:
Users click:
 Export button to begin export process.
 Stop button to halt the export process.
 Close button to close the Multi ASCII Export form.

Export LAS
To export LAS file:

1. Go to Menu bar > Wells > Export> Select Export LAS.


2. Into Export LAS File form.

54 | P a g e
- Basic Info:
 Select Well: Click on ‘Select Well’ drop down list box to select the well
data will be exported.
 Top Depth: Enter the top depth of the output interval. Default value is top
well depth.
 Bottom Depth: Enter the bottom depth of the output interval. Default value
is the bottom well depth.
 Well Step: the default value will be the current well step increment. The
user may enter a new value to change the LAS output well step.
 NULL Value: the default value is -999.25. The user may enter a new value
to change the LAS output NULL value.
- Location Info:

55 | P a g e
 Well name: the default text is the name of selected well. The user may
enter new well name in the LAS output file.
 Location, County, State, Country are optional
- Business Info
 Company, Service Company, Unique Well ID, API number and license
number are optional. The user may enter text.
 Date: the default date is the current date in your computer. The user may
select the date from drop-down list box.
- Available Curves table: this table will display all curves of the selected well. The
user could not change the Curve Name, Data Set and Unit of curves.
- User selects the curves to export by clicking on it and re-click to inverse. And
press forward arrow. User can select multi – curves by clicking on multi curves.
Keeping Ctrl +A to select all curves.
- Forward arrow: Move curves from Available Curves table to Selected Curves
table.
- Backward arrow: Move curves from Selected Curves to Available Curves table.
- Selected Curves table: This contains the selected output curves for selected well.
 Curve Name: display the selected curves of selected well. Users could not
edit the name of curves on Curve Name column.
 Dataset: display the dataset that contains curve name.
 Export Name: display the name of output curves in output file. Export
Name column is editable and allows the user to change the names of the
curves for the output file.
- Curves are selected by highlighting a curve and using arrow buttons.
- The order that the curves will be output is the same the order in the ‘Selected
Curves’ table. To re-arrange the order, use the up/down arrows.
- Export File:

56 | P a g e
 Output File: allow the user to select the output directory where the LAS
file will be written.
 The ‘Browse’ button can be used to select this directory.
3. Press ‘Save’ button to export LAS file.
4. Press ‘Cancel’ button to close Export LAS File form.

Export Multi LAS


To export Multi Las files:

1. Go to Menu bar > Wells > Export> Select Export Multi LAS.
2. Multi Las Export form is displayed:

Explanation of components in Multi LAS export form:

Wells area:

57 | P a g e
 Export column: users are allowed to check specific wells to export or check all
to select all wells.
 Well name column: name of listed wells.
 File name column: file name of associated well names.
 All curves: check it to export all available curves in LAS files.
 By Alias: all available curves will be displayed by Alias.
 By Family: all available curves will be displayed by Family.

 Select and Deselect button : Move curves from Available Aliases/Families


to Selected Aliases/Families and vice versa.

 Order Up and Down button : Move objects up or down in selected list.

Settings area:

58 | P a g e
 NULL Value: WI allows users to define Null Value manually, default: -999.25.
 Decimal: WI allows users to define decimal places for values in export LAS files.
 File Prefix/Suffix: WI allows users to define Prefix/Suffix of export LAS files’
name.
 Overwrite Files: check it to replace existing files in Export Folder if the exported
one has the same name.
 Export Well Header: check it if users want exported file contains well header.
4. Export Folder:
 Browse button: use to browse to the location of the Export Folder.
5. After finish settings:

Users click:

 Export button to begin export process.


 Stop button to halt the export process.
 Close button to close the Multi LAS Export form.

Export Core Data


WI allows users to export data from multiple curves of multiple wells using core curves
or depths dataset as depth points on which the data will be exported.

To export Core Data:

1. Go to Menu bar > Wells > Export> Select Export Core Data. Export Core
Data form is displayed.

59 | P a g e
Components of Export Core Data form:

Select Wells area:

 Filter wells:
o Name: use letters to quickly search for well name.
o Group: use letters to quickly search for group name.
 Available wells: list of available wells in the project
 Selected wells: list of selected wells.
 Select and deselect button: click right arrow to select curves and left one to
deselect.

Export options area:

60 | P a g e
 By Name: available core data will be displayed by name.
 By Alias: available core data will be displayed by alias (if aliases are assigned).
 Available wells: list of available wells in the project.
 Selected wells: list of selected wells.
 Use depths mask (separated by comma) (only activated in single well mode): WI
allows users to manually input depths separated (e.g. 1500, 1700, 2000) or use
Load Depths button to load from excel files (*.csv).
 Select and deselect button: click right arrow to select curves and left one to
deselect.

Advance area:

 Export Curves: users are allowed to choose single or multiple curves to export.
o By Name: available core data will be displayed by name.
o By Alias: available core data will be displayed by alias (if aliases are
assigned).
 Select and deselect button: click right arrow to select curves and left one to
deselect.
 Combine results into 1 file: check this box to combine the results into 1 file.
 File format: check Asc to create an ASCII file or Csv to create a .CSV file.

61 | P a g e
2. After finishing settings:

Users can click:

 Export button to open the Export Folder, click Export button again to begin
export process.
 Close button to close the Export Core Data form.

Export Well Header


To export Well Header files:

1. Go to Menu bar > Wells > Export> Select Export Well Header.
2. Into Export Well Header form:

62 | P a g e
Explanation of components in Export Well Header form

Select Wells area:

 Export column: users are allowed to check specific wells to export or check all
to select all wells.
 Well name column: name of listed wells.
 Top Depth column: top depth of associated well name.
 Bottom Depth column: bottom depth of associated well name.

Select Data Fields to Export area:

 Select and Deselect button : Move curves from All Fields to Fields to
Export. In WI, Name, Latitude and Longitude are set to be compulsory fields to
export in Well Header.
3. After finish settings:

Users click:

63 | P a g e
 Export button locate export folder and click Export button again to begin export
process.
 Close button to close the Export Well Header form.

Export Curve Parameters


To export input curve:

1. Data tree > Wells > Specific Well > Interpretation Models > Specific
Interpretation Model > Right click and select Run workflow.
2. Press Input Curve to open Input Curve form.
3. Press ‘Export’ button to launch a “Save the Input Curve Parameter file” dialog
and give the file name and select directory. By the default WI will go to the
directory of project. User can change the directory to save file.
4. WI will export all parameter of all zones in input curves form.
5. Press ‘Save’ button to save data.
6. Press ‘Cancel’ button to close “Save the Input Curve Parameter file” dialog.

64 | P a g e
Export Fluid Parameters
To export input fluid parameter:

1. Data tree > Wells > Specific Well > Interpretation Models > Specific
Interpretation Model > Right click and select Run workflow.
2. Press Input Fluid to open Input Fluid form.
3. Press ‘Export’ button to launch a “Save the Input Fluid Parameter file” dialog
and give the file name and select directory. By the default WI will go to the
project’s directory. User can manually change the directory to save file.
4. WI will export all parameter of all zones in input fluid form.
5. Press ‘Save’ button to save data.
6. Press ‘Cancel’ button to close “Save the Input Fluid Parameter file” dialog.

65 | P a g e
66 | P a g e
Export Mineral Model Parameters
To export mineral model parameter:

1. Data tree > Wells > Specific Well > Interpretation Models > Specific
Interpretation Model > Right click and select Run workflow.
2. On Workflow tree > Press ‘Input Mineral Model’ to open Mineral Model form.
3. Press ‘Export’ button to launch a “Save the Input Mineral Model Parameter file”
dialog and give the file name and select directory. By the default WI will go to
the project’s directory. User can manually change the directory.
4. WI will export all parameters of all zones of mineral model form.
5. Press ‘Save’ button to save data.
6. Press ‘Cancel’ button to close “Save the Input Mineral Model Parameter file”
dialog.

67 | P a g e
68 | P a g e
69 | P a g e
Part IV: Data Analysis
Well-Insight provides an overview of the main of data analysis tools in WI, the type

Of data that can be analyses, and typical applications.

Data analysis tool are designed for:

 Data viewing
 Exploratory data analysis
 Quality control of data and interpretation results

In Well-Insight™ data analysis tools are arranged in menu bar > Data Analysis or Users
can find the 3 tools of Data Analysis: Log plot, Histogram, Cross plot under specific well.

70 | P a g e
Chapter 6: Log plot

Log Plot Interface


Fracture Reservoir Petrophysics (WI) is built around a graphical user-interface which
allows the user to perform the majority of interpretation workflow steps using unique
screen displays. WI provides some basic log template formats to help user view data
quickly. These formats can be launched from drop-down menus and then customized by
adding, moving or deleting log tracks and log curves to the user preferred display
characteristics.

How to launch ‘Log Plot’ in WI:

1. Menu bar > Data Analysis > Click on log plot icon.
2. From Project Browser > Wells > Specific Well (ex Well_1) > Log plot > Right
click and select New Log Plot.

Up to 250 log plots can be displayed simultaneously. Multiple log plots can be launched
for one well or many different wells.

The Plot Window


The Log Plot window is highly interactive, allowing the user to:

- Add new tracks


- Set up the curves to be displayed in log tracks
- Re-arrange the log track order
- Change curve display properties (color, line style, line thickness)
- Set shading using launched menu from the log plot window
- Selecting curves for cross-plotting and histogram

71 | P a g e
Menu icons on Log plot

The icons in log plot window:

72 | P a g e
Icons Name of Icons Description

The 'Edit Format' allows user to set up and


Edit Format
change the Log plot format

The ‘Save Plot Format’ allows user to save


Save as LogPlot Template a plot format for later use. All the
interactive features in the plot are saved.

Save as Save as new logplot in active well.

The ‘Print’ allows user prints the log plot


as graphics files, sent directly to a
Print connected printer or copied into the
WINDOWS clipboard for incorporation in
other documents.

The ‘Scale’ allows user to set up a log


Scale
vertical scale.

The ‘Zoom in’ allows user to zoom in log


Zoom in
vertical scale.

The ‘Zoom out’ allows user to zoom out


Zoom out
log vertical scale.

The ‘Reset’ allows user to set the vertical


Reset
log scale come back the last settings

The ‘Crop display’ allows user to focus on


Crop display
interest area on reference track

Plot Range The ‘Plot Range’ allows user to define,


Save and recall multiple depth ranges and

73 | P a g e
associated vertical scales settings

The ‘View Whole Well’ allows user to


View Whole well
define, save depth range is whole well.

The ‘Add Depth Axis’ allows user to add


Add Depth Axis
new depth track on current log plot.

The New Track item allows user to add


New Track
new log track on current log plot

The ‘Duplicate Track’ allows user to copy


Duplicate Track the current track settings, with all curves
and shadings into a new track

The ‘Delete Track’ allows user to remove


Delete Track
the selected track from current log plot

The ‘Add Marker’ allows user to add


Add Marker
marker into current track of log plot.

The ‘Add Zone’ allows user to add zone


Add Zone
into current donation track of log plot

The ‘Add Annotation’ allows user to add


Add Annotation
annotation into current track of log plot

The ‘Add Image’ allows user to add an


Add Image
image into current track of log plot.

The ‘Add Shading’ allows user to create


Add Shading shading between two curves or between a
curve and a constant value on current track

74 | P a g e
of log plot

Remove Visual

The ‘Cross plot’ allows user to create cross


Cross plot plot chart between 2 selected curves on
current track of log plot.

The ‘Histogram’ allows user to create


Histogram histogram from selected curve on current
track of log plot

The ‘Edit curve’ allows user to active Edit


Edit Curve
curve feature.

The ‘Baseline Shift’ allows user to active


Baseline Shift
Baseline shift feature

Allows user to switch from logarithmic


Switch to Linear track
track to linear track

Switch to Logarithmic Allows user to switch from linear track to


track logarithmic track

Depth shift Launch depth shift feature

Refresh Refresh the logplot

Screen Navigation and Sizing


The log plot shown below consists of 12 log tracks, including the depth track and
reference track on the left hand side of the display. The reference track shows the entire
depth range for the well, with the current display section (in the main plot window) as red

75 | P a g e
area. By moving the red area in reference track, the user can quickly navigate to any part
of the log display in the main log plot window. The user can change the depth interval
being displayed by drag the top and bottom of the red area up or down to new position.

- The curve ‘Header’ box can be resized by clicking on the bottom border of the
header box and dragging it up or down to a new size.
- The vertical scroll bar, to the left of log plot window, allows the user to scroll the
main log screen display up or down. Clicking above or below the scroll button in
the scroll track will move the display up or down by one screen interval. Clicking

76 | P a g e
on the arrows at the top or bottom of the scroll track, will scroll the display up or
down 10% of the display interval.
- The horizontal scroll bar, located in the bottom of log plot window, moves the
display horizontally in increments of one track. Normally, it is better to simply
expand the whole window if some of the tracks are not displayed.
- The red area on reference track to help user easy to zoom in, zoom out and
move to your wish area. User can also use the “Scale” and its associated drop-
down lists of plot scales allows the user to quickly change the vertical scale of the
log plot display.

Reference Track
The reference track is always the first track of log plot window. The Gamma ray curve is
displayed by default. If the well is lacked of Gamma ray curve, the first curve in the first
dataset of well will be displayed on reference track.

77 | P a g e
There are two ways to change the vertical scale of log plot window:

1. User can drag the top and bottom of red area on reference track.
2. User can select the default scale on menu bar of log plot.

78 | P a g e
Depth Track
The depth track is usually the second track on log plot window, where the reference depth
is displayed according to the available and selected datum such as MD, TVD, and
TVDSS. By default, the MD reference depth (in general the measured depth) is displayed
in depth track.

How to add Depth Track into log plot:

1. Select existed track that you wish to add depth track beside > Right click on
selected track > Select Add Depth Track.
2. New Depth Track is added to the right of selected track as default.

Depth value is displayed in center of depth track.

Depth ‘ticks’ is also displayed on left and right of depth track as default.

To change the settings of depth track:

1. Double click on Depth track’s header > Depth – Properties form is opened.

79 | P a g e
2. Into Depth – Properties form.
3. Or double click on depth track > Depth – Properties form is opened.

80 | P a g e
- Show title: tick on to display the title of track and unchecked to un-display
- Title: allows user to change the title of depth track by typing text
- Top justification and bottom justification: allows user to change the alignment
of title of depth track
- Track background: select background color for depth track by selecting color
from drop down list
- Geometry – width (inches): allows user to change the width of log track by
manually typing number.

81 | P a g e
Linear Track
How to add linear track:

1. Left mouse click on existed track that you wish to add new linear track beside >
Right click on selected track > Select Add Log Track.
2. New linear log track is added to the right of selected track as default.

How to change settings of linear track:

1. Double click on linear log track > Track – Properties form is displayed.

82 | P a g e
2. Into Track – Properties form:
- Header area:
 Show title: allows user to tick on/off to display the title of log track.
 Title: Number is displayed as default. Title of log track allows user to change
name by manually typing text.
 Top justification and Bottom justification allow user to change the alignment
of title of depth track by selecting 3 options: left, right and center.
- Grid area:
 Show value grid: allows user to tick on/off to display the vertical grid line of
log track. Tick on to display the vertical grid line and tick off to un-display
the vertical grid line.
 Major ticks: to set up the major grid lines on log track, allows user to type
number. The default value is 1.
 Minor ticks count: allows user to set up the minor grid lines on log track, the
default value is 5.
- Show depth grid: allows user to tick on/off. Tick on the display of the horizontal
grid lines of log track. The horizontal grid line is identical with the major ticks of
depth value. Tick off to un-display the horizontal depth grid lines.
- Track background: select background color for log track by selecting color from
drop down list.
- Geometry – width (inches): allows user to change the width of log track by
manually typing number.

How to create linear track from logarithmic track:

83 | P a g e
1. Left mouse click on existed logarithmic track that you wish to change to linear
track > Right click on selected track > Switch To Linear.
2. Logarithmic log track will be changed to linear log track

Logarithmic Track
How to create logarithmic track from linear track:

1. Left mouse click on existed linear track that you wish to change to logarithmic
track > Right click on selected track > Switch To Logarithmic.
2. Linear track will be changed to logarithmic track.

84 | P a g e
How to change settings of logarithmic track:

1. Double click on logarithmic log track > Track – Properties form is displayed
2. Into Track – Properties form:

85 | P a g e
- Header area:
 Show title: allows user to tick on/off to display the title of log track
 Title: Number is displayed as default. Title of log track allows user to change
name by manually typing text
 Top justification and Bottom justification allow user to change the alignment
of title of depth track by selecting 3 options: left, right and center.
- Label:
 Show labels: Tick on to active the Label feature.

86 | P a g e
 Format: allows user to typing text.
 Show end labels: Tick on to display the label in the end of log track
 User can define the font of text by press font button.
- Grid:
 Show value grid: allows user to tick on/off to display the vertical grid line of
log track. Tick on to display the logarithmic grid lines and tick off to un-
display the logarithmic grid lines.
 Decade count: Number of log decades to be drawn for logarithmic track.
 Log scale: The start logarithmic line.
- Show depth grid: allow users to tick on/off. Tick on the display the horizontal
grid lines of log track. The horizontal grid line is identical with the major ticks of
depth value. Tick off to un-display the horizontal depth grid lines.
- Geometry – width (inches): allows user to change the width of log track by
manually typing number.
- Color Track: select background color for logarithmic track by selecting color
from drop down list

Zonation Track
How to add zonation track

1. Left mouse click on existed track that you wish to add new zonation track beside
> Right click on selected track > Select ‘Add Zonation track’.
2. Or from menu bar of log plot > Press on Add Zonation Track icon.
3. Zone Properties form is displayed.

Into Zone – Properties Form

- Header:
 Show title: allows user to tick on/off to display the title of log track

87 | P a g e
 Title: Zone is displayed as default. Title of zonation track allows user to
change name by manually typing text.
 Top justification and Bottom justification allow user to change the alignment
of title of depth track by selecting 3 options: left, right and center.
- Color Track: select background color for logarithmic track by selecting color
from drop down list.
- Geometry – width (inches): allows user to change the width of log track by
manually typing number.
- Parameters:
 Parameter Set: allows user to select existed parameter set by click on drop
down list and select the parameter set. There are 2 zonation types: Specific
interpretation model and user defined.
 Zone Set:
 For Specific Interpretation model: uses need to select zone set is
mineral zone or curve zone or fluid zone by drop down list.
 For ‘User Defined’: user needs to select the existed zone set by click
on drop down list. In case user wants to create new zone set, press
the ‘+’ icon beside, the “Create New Zonation Set’’ form pops up. In
this form user manually type name of zone set.

- Press Apply to display wishes zonation to log plot


- Press Cancel to close the Zone – Properties form.

88 | P a g e
How to View Curve on Log Plot
To view the specific curve to log plot:

1. Select the curve that want to view on log plot by left click mouse on curve name
on data tree
2. Drag and drop the selected curve into the wishes log track of log plot

Curve Properties
To change the settings of curve:

1. From log plot Header > Double click mouse on the curve that you wish to change
the setting of curve.
2. Or from the log track that curve was displayed > Double click left mouse on curve
> The Curve Properties form is opened as below

89 | P a g e
3. Into Curve Properties Form
- Well: display the well name that curve belongs to. User cannot edit the well name.
- Header:
 Name: display the name of curve as format: “Name of folder that curve
belongs”.
 Alias: allows user to define name of curve to display into log plot by manually
typing text.
 Show header: tick on to display curve header and tick off to hide curve header
on the top of a log plot.

90 | P a g e
- Scale:
 Min Value: allows user to define the min value of a curve on log track display.
 Max value: allows user to define the max value of a curve on log track display.
 Auto value scales: if user ticks on “auto value scales”, the min and max value
will be read min and max value in imported file.
 Min depth and Max depth: display the min depth and max depth of curve.
User cannot edit.
- Interpolation:
 Display mode: user can choose the type to display of curve as Line, Symbol,
both or None. If the curve displays as Symbol, user can choose the symbol type
as: circle, cross, diamond, dot, plus, square, star, triangle.
 Symbol size: allows user to type number to define the size of symbol.
 Edit: to select color of symbol.
 Block Position: allows displaying curve line with block type.
- Display type:
 Log/Linear: user can choose to display curve as linear or logarithmic.
 Display as: choose the style of the display from the drop down box:
 Normal: display as normal type.
 Cumulative: is used, for example, to plot lithology – type shading.
The value plotted for a cumulative style curve is equal to the curve value
plus the values of all other “cumulative” style curves in the log track whose
names appear higher in the curve list than the curve being plotted.
 Mirror: will plot the selected curve with its mirror image (same
curve with reversed scale). The gap between the two curves is shaded with
the selected curve color.
 Pip: the pip style is designed to plot horizontal lines from the data
point to the value zero.

91 | P a g e
 Line Style: Press "Edit" to choose color as well as line width and line style for
curve.

Add Marker
How to add marker:

1. Log plot > Log track > Right click on log track and select ‘Add marker’.
2. The mouse becomes the marker icon > move the mouse along the log track > Left
mouse click at the position that you wish to add marker.

92 | P a g e
Add Annotation
The Add annotation option launches a text editor which allows the user to write
annotation on log track at any depth.

How to add annotation:

1. Log plot > Log track > Right click on log track and select ‘Add Annotation’.
2. The ‘Text Field Properties’ form pops up to user define annotation.
3. Into the Text Field Properties form:
- Text attributes: allows user to type text. The limit of text is 200 characters.
- Text and Background are used to define the color and format of text and
background.

93 | P a g e
- Boundaries: allow user to set up the top depth, bottom depth of annotation and the
size of annotation.
- Options: allows user to set the alignment of annotation.
- Press OK button to perform the annotation.
4. In case user wants to edit the settings of annotation, users can double click on
existed annotation to launch the Text Field Properties form to edit.

Add Image
How to add image:

1. Log plot > Log track > Right click on log track and select ‘Add Image’.
2. The ‘Image Properties’ form pops up.
3. Into the Image Properties form:

94 | P a g e
- Image Location: Press Browse to get the image from directory. FRP supports
to read image with the formats:
 BMP files (*.bmp)
 EXIF files (*.exif)
 GIF files (*.gif)
 JPEG file (*jpeg; *jpg)
 PNG files (*png)
 TIFF files (*.tiff; *tif)
- Boundaries:

Top and Bottom: allows user to define the top depth and bottom depth of image. The
Image will be zoom in and zoom out vertically following the top and bottom depth that
users set up.

 Left (%): allows user to define the display percent of image


 Width: allows the user to define the width of image by manually typing number.

Create Shading
How to create Shading:

95 | P a g e
1. Log plot > Log track >Select the curve that you want to create shading by left
mouse click
2. Right click on selected curve > Select Create Shading.
3. Or from menu bar on log plot press create shading icon
4. Shading is created between selected curve and left log track as default

How to edit the shading properties:

1. From log track header > Double click on shading header


2. Or from log track > double click on shading’s area
3. The Shading Properties form is opened.
4. Into Shading Properties form:
- Name: allows user to define name of displayed shading on log track header by
manually typing.
- Fill pattern, Foreground, background are options to set the color and shading
pattern.
- Positive/Negative: was designed to set up shading on positive side or negative
side. WI defines the left of curve is negative side and the right of curve is
positive side.

96 | P a g e
 If ‘No positive fill’ is tick on, the shading will not be displayed on the right
of curve and the shading header is disappeared on the positive side.
 If ‘No negative fill’ is tick on, the shading will not be displayed on the left
of curve and the shading header is disappeared on the negative side.
 Users also can set up the color of shading header by using the Positive color
and Negative color.
- Fill: allows user to fill shading on the left or right of curve which is connected
with Positive/negative fill.
 Custom: allows user to fill shading between the curve and the user
value.
 On the Log Plot the user can move the shading line.

97 | P a g e
How to create shading between 2 curves:

1. From log track header, using CTRL keyboard to select 2 curves simultaneously;
2. Or from log track, press Ctrl to select 2 curves simultaneously
3. Right click and select “create Shading”
4. Shading is created between 2 curves as default.

98 | P a g e
Chapter 7: Cross plot

Cross Plot Interface


How to launch “Cross plot” in WI

1. Main Menu bar > Data Analysis > Click on Cross plot icon.
2. Or From Project Browser > Wells > Specific Well (example Well_1) > Cross plot
> Right click and select New Crossplotor press any cross plot template

Up to 250 cross plots can be displayed simultaneously. Multiple cross plots can be
launched for one well or many different wells.

WI supplies the list of cross plot templates to help user views data quickly. They are:

- Neutron – Gamma ray


- Neutron – Density
- Neutron – Sonic
- Neutron – Deep Resistivity (Rt)
- Density – Gamma ray
- Sonic – Density
- Sonic – Deep Resistivity (Rt)
- Sonic – Total Porosity

An example of a cross plot is displayed below:

99 | P a g e
Cross Plot Window
The Cross Plot window is highly interactive, allowing the user to:

- Set up the curves to be displayed in X-axis and Y-axis;


- Present data as interval depth or zone depth
- Easy to view data following coloring data
- Change curve display properties (color, symbol style, symbol thickness)

Menu Icons on Cross Plot


The icons in Cross plot window

Icons Name of Icons Description

Edit Format Open the Crossplot Format form.

The ‘Save Format’ allows user to save a


Save Format cross plot format for later use. All the
interactive features in the cross plot are

100 | P a g e
saved.

Open the Print Preview form, for printing


Print
the chart.

The ‘Active Zone’ allows user to turn on


Active Zone
viewing data as zone depth.

The ‘Zoom in’ allows user to zoom in cross


Zoom in
plot.

The ‘Default Zoom’ allows user to set the


Default zoom
cross plot come back to default zoom.

The ‘Zoom out’ allows user to zoom out


Zoom out
cross plot.

Refresh Rereads the original data

Crossplot Format
Cross plot format form is designed to set up the setting of cross plot.

101 | P a g e
There are 5 tabs in Crossplot Format form:

1. Scales tab

Scales tab is designed to set up the curves will be displayed on cross plot, coloring data,
point style, depth interval to view data.

- X Axis and Y axis: select curve name in corresponding dataset from drop down
menu, left scale and right scale is automatically get from curve family and user
can manually change by typing preferred value. If the selected curves are
displayed as log, users should tick on 'log' checkbox.
- Major: is the major grid lines into cross plot. User manually define by typing
positive number.
- Minor: is the minor grid lines into cross plot. User manually define by typing
positive number.

102 | P a g e
- Color: select the curve from drop down list to coloring points into cross plot
following the color of selected curve.
- Point Symbol: Select the point symbol from drop down menu to change the point
style into cross plot.

- Overlay lines: is designed to users select service company chart book


'Neutron/Density' and 'Neutron/Sonic'... lines to display with crossplot data.
User can choose what kind of overlay from drop down menu. Overlay line is
optional to display on crossplot. Especially WI is an unique software provide the
overlay lines for Granitoid rock types classification.

103 | P a g e
- Interval depth: view data into crossplot as specific interval depth. The default
interval depth is from top depth to bottom depth of selected well.
- Zone depth: view data into crossplot as specific zone. User can select zone from
interpretation model folder or User defined folder.
2. Discriminators tab
Discriminators tab is designed to filter what data are displayed in the crossplot. There are
a maximum of 10 discriminator sets that can be used at one and combined using 'and' or
'or' type logic.

User can select all curves in all datasets of current working well to use in discriminators
tab.
3. Axis Color tab
The Axis Color tab is used to select the color legend is displayed on cross-plot following
the color curve that was selected in Scales tab.
To display cross-plot color legend by using axis color tab:

104 | P a g e
- Select Color curve in Scales tab
- Go to Axis Color tab > Tick on 'Define Axis Colors'
- Define Min Value and Max Value for each interval.
WI do not allow user to choose overlap interval value in color axis tab. The default color
for un-selected interval value black.
- Save colors to file: to save current color/label set up scheme to an external ascii
(*.zcl) file.
- Load colors from file: to restore the existed color/label set-up scheme from an
external ascii (*.zcl) file.

105 | P a g e
4. Options tab
Options tab is used to set-up the title of cross-plot, X axis title and Y axis title. If you
leave the boxes blank, the cross-plot default titles and axis labeling are applied.
- Main title (hard Copy): allows user to set up the title in hard copy (print file or plot
page) by manually typing text.
- Crossplot title: allows user to change the crossplot title by manually typing text.

106 | P a g e
- X axis label, Y axis label, Color axis label: allows user to set up the title of X, Y
and Color axis by manually typing text.
- Hard copy: allows user to define the width and height of plot range. If 'Width' and
'Height' boxes are left blank, the plot is automatically scaled to fit to the plot page.

- Checking the 'Plot Zone, depth and parameter info' and 'Plot Archive Zone Title',
add this label from the plot.
- Frequency is the histograms of X axis's curve and Y axis's curve. Tick on Display
to active this feature.
5. Reference Window tab
WI supports Reference Window to view the selected curves will be displayed on 1
log track at right beside of crossplot window. Users select curve in table and define the
interval depth to display the selected curves.

107 | P a g e
Active Zone
The left side of crossplot window displays the Active zone when data is viewed as zone
depth.

Which ways to display Active Zone:

1. Crossplot format form > Scales tab >Tick on Zone Depth > Select Zone set and
Active zone from drop down menu
2. Press Active icon on cross plot menu bar
All zones of zone set are displayed on Active Zone window. The selected active zone is
highlighted in zone list. Users can select multiple active zones by press and keep Ctrl and
select zone on active zone window or come back to Crossplot format form to re-select
active zone in scales tab.

Crossplot Frequency Info


WI provides the crossplot Frequency Info to do statistic of amount of point in each
interval of curves.

108 | P a g e
- Frequency Divisions: allows user to choose the divided interval quantity to do the
statistic by typing positive number.
- X curve and Y curve tables: displays the amount of points in each divided interval.
- Max Value Range: The interval which amount of points is maximum.
- Bin Number: the divided intervals use for Max Value Range.
- Max Value: Maximum number in Max value range which has maximum point
number.
- Point number: the amount of point of Max value in max value range.

Z axes

Z axes tool is option to view cross plot data by color axis or not. There are 2 options in Z
axes: Zone or Curve. If you want to view data by coloring code, you should tick on curve.
In case you want to turn off color axis press Zone.

109 | P a g e
Functions
How to create Polygon, Rectangle or User Line into crossplot.

1. Menu bar on Cross plot > Functions > Create Polygon, Rectangle or User Line.
2. Left click mouse on cross plot to start point > Move the cursor and left click on
cross plot to pick a next point > Right-click to stop digitization.
3. The corners of an area can be moved by clicking on a corner and dragging the
point to new position.
How to delete Polygon/Rectangle/User Line:
1. Go to menu bar on crossplot> Functions > Select delete Area or User Line.

Pickett Plot

The purpose of the Pickett plot is to help the user to determine Rw using a double
logarithmic plot of a true resistivity measurement (on the X axis) versus a porosity
measurement (on the Y axis).

In addition to the points that have appeared after the selection of the well(s), four lines
are also present in the Cross-plot (see below). These lines correspond to the water
saturations for different resistivities. The four lines correspond to a water saturation from
bottom to top of 100 %, 70 %, 50 % and 30 %. The slope of these lines is - m and the
intersection of the 100 % Sw line with the porosity axis is a * Rw.

Equations:

110 | P a g e
Sw=1.00:log10(y)=(-1./m)*(log10(x)-log10(a*Rw))

Sw=0.2:log10(y)=(-1./m*)(log10(x)-log10(1*Rw)-log10(1/pow(0.2,2)))

Sw=0.3:log10(y)=(-1./m)*(log10(x)-log10(1*Rw)-log10(1/pow(0.3,2)))

Sw=0.5:log10(y)=(-1./m)*(log10(x)-log10(1*Rw)-log10(1/pow(0.5,2)))

When these parameters are adjusted, the positions of the lines will change until a
satisfactory result is reached.

How to open Pickett plot form

1. Open data tree for specific interpretation model for clastic module.

2. Right click on 'Cross plot' > New cross plot > Pickett plot > Pickett plot form is
opened.

3. Into Pickett plot form:

A left click on edit format in the Cross-plot activates the property window. In this
window, in properties, the user can modify the appearance of the points, color of
points.
A left click on Pickett line icon> Sw lines for Pickett plot> Sw will show on cross
plot. User can change the value of a, m, n, Rw until a satisfactory result is reached.
Workflow for Pickett plot

111 | P a g e
112 | P a g e
113 | P a g e
Chapter 8: Histogram

Introduction to Histogram
This chapter is to introduce the overview information, presentation and edit tools of
histograms function. The two main parts covered within these documents are Histogram
Interface and Histogram Edit Format.

Histogram Interface

The Histogram graphic plot can be activated in a number of ways.

 By selecting the Histogram menu item under the Data Analysis menu.
 By using the speed button ( ).
 By 'right-mouse-button clicking' in the track of a Log Plot and choosing the
Histogram from the pop-up menu. In this case the histogram plot will activate
with default parameters. .

114 | P a g e
Histogram Window

Statistics
Within the histogram window, WI provides various statistics
information as follow:

- Variables: Each histogram will input variables/arrays with name of log curve and
the depth interval of such curve.
- Number of Values: is the number of discrete points of the curve shown on the
histogram.
- Min Value: is the minimum value of the array database.
- Max Values: is the maximum value of the array database.
- Average: is the average value (arithmetic mean) of the array database.
- Average Deviation: is the average of the absolute deviations from a central point
and is a statistic summary of statistical dispersion or variability.

115 | P a g e
- Standard Deviation: is a quantity descriptive statistics used to measure the
dispersion of the data set has been tabulated frequencies.
- Variance: is a measurement of statistical dispersion of the variable implying that
the how far the values of variables distance from expected value.
- Skewness: this is an indicator of the asymmetry of the distribution compare to the
mean.
- Kurtosis: this is an indicator of the peak of the distribution.
- Median: is the numerical value separating the higher half and the lower half of a
data sample, a population, or a probability distribution.
- P50: is a good middle estimate that 50% of estimates exceed the P50 estimate (and
50% of estimates are less than the P50 estimate).
- P10: is an estimate that 90% of estimates exceed the P10 estimate (and 10% of
estimates are less than the P10 estimate).

The icons in histogram window:

Icons Name of Icons Description

The Save Format allows the user to save a


Save Format histogram for later use. All the interactive
features in the histogram are saved.

The Edit Format allows the user to set up


Edit Format and change the Histogram format and
parameter information.

User can choose histogram by zone and


Active Zone
show or hidden zones within the histogram.

Frequency Information Statistics values of the curve.

116 | P a g e
Allows the user to display the gaussian
Gaussian
distribution function on the histogram.

Allows the user to display the cumulative


Cumulative
distribution function on the histogram.

Plot Bars Show data on histogram by Bars.

Plot Curves Show data on histogram by Curves.

Allow y-axis displayed in type of


Plot type
frequency or percent.

Choose color for data by zone or input


Color
curves.

Histogram Edit Format


There are 3 tabs within the Histogram Edit Format menu that are Scales,
Discriminators, Options and Reference Window.

117 | P a g e
The Scales Tab is used to set up wells, curves and zones visualized in the histogram plot.

Choose depth:

 The user can input both the Top and Bottom depths by ticking on Interval Depth
or otherwise, input Zones and Active zones depths by choosing Zonal Depths.

X-Axes:

 The Curve Name is selected from the drop-down list which displays all curves for
the currently selected well.
 The Number of divisions box allows the user to define the number of classes into
which to divide the curve data. The smaller the Number of divisions is, the larger
the class size. This also has implications for the appearance of the histogram data.
 The Left Scale and Right Scale entries are user-editable numbers.
 User can show gaussian distribution function of data, hidden or show grid of data
as logarithmic or line.
 The Flip Horizontal is to convert the number series displayed under the X-Axes
from Ascending to Descending and vice versa.

Y Axes:

The user can display the y-axis by frequency or percent and choose color for bars or
curve shown in histogram.

118 | P a g e
The Discriminators Tab

 Use: Tick on the box representing the selected curve.


 Value/ Curve: Select the curve name/ value that user want to add in the
discriminators table. The curve name can be typed or selected from a drop-down
box.
 Func: Stands for the function, user can customize the functions: >, >=, =, =< or <.
 Combine with: or , and.
Data are plotted when discriminators are true.

119 | P a g e
The Option Tab
- Main title (hard Copy): allows user to set up the title in hard copy (print file or plot
page) by manually typing text.
- Histogram title: allows user to change the histogram title by manually typing text.
- Hard copy: allows user to define the width and height of plot range. If 'Width' and
'Height' boxes are left blank, the plot is automatically scaled to fit to the plot page.
- Checking the 'Plot Zone, depth and parameter info' and 'Plot Archive Zone Title',
add this label from the plot.
- Frequency is the histograms of X axis's curve and Y axis's curve. Tick on Display
to active this feature.

120 | P a g e
The Reference Window Tab
WI supports Reference Window to view the selected curves will be displayed on 1
log track at right beside of histogram window. Users select curve in table and
define the interval depth to display the selected curves

Histogram Active Zone


WI provided Active Zone tool ( ) to display the histogram by zones previously divided
by user. The zone List (All Zone) at the left side of the histogram can be detached from
the histogram window and resized as required.

Histogram Frequency Info


WI provides the histogram Frequency Info to do statistic of amount of point in each
interval of curves.

121 | P a g e
- Frequency Divisions: allows user to choose the divided interval quantity to do the
statistic by typing positive number.
- Max Value Range: The interval which amount of points is maximum.
- Bin Number: the divided intervals use for Max Value Range.
- Max Value: Maximum number in Max value range which has maximum point
number.
- Point number: the amount of point of Max value in max value range.

122 | P a g e
PART V: Data Processing
The Data Processing menu provides tools to Predict, Select, Calculate and Edit data of
the curves.

 Data Editing
 User Formulas
 Calculation

123 | P a g e
Chapter 9: Data Editing
The Data Processing menu provides tools to predict, select, calculate and edit data of the
curves.

Add New Curves

The Add New Curves tool in WI allows user to add new curves in data processing.

Curve Information:

 Well: allows user choose well to create new curve.


 Dataset:allows user choose location to save the New Curve.
 Family:allows user choose the types of curve.
 Curve Name: allows user type the curve name by manual.
 Unit:allows user presenting the curve unit. User can type manually.
 Initial Value: the starting value of new curve.

Curve Listing Edit

124 | P a g e
 The Curve Listing Edit tool in WI allows user to edit data at each data point. In
the FRM Curve Listing Edit box user can choose the curve that needs to edit by
select the curve. Curve data will be displayed together with the respectively depth
and users can change data for a custom. In the Right of FRM Curve Listing Edit
box, WI support reference track for user can see log view of data. If user wants to
use reference track, click to reference properties:

125 | P a g e
 The Reference Window Tab

 WI supports Reference Window to view the selected curves that will be displayed
on 1 log track at right beside of histogram window. User select curve in table and
define the interval depth to display the selected curves.

Edit Curve

 There are two ways that user can follow to edit curve. The first way is to use link
Data Processing>Edit curve> Interactive Curve Edit. The second way is to
directly right click on the curve need editing and choose ( ) icon. The pen icon
will show up on the log plot. The user can use stream mode or point mode on the
top left side of the window to edit curve.

126 | P a g e
 After editing curve, the user must tick on ( ) to save the new edited curve. The
Save Result pop-up widow will appear. User names the new edited curve by
choosing/typing on the Result Curve box and choose the dataset where the curve
will be saved. With the Create Backup Curve checked, a backup curve will be
copied from the input curve. The backup curve name can be defined by user.

Baseline Shift
Well Insight provides “Baseline Shift” feature which allows users to shift curves by
using a baseline.

To use baseline shift feature:

Launch Baseline Shift module by select curve in logplot window, then click on Baseline
Shift icon ( ) on the tool bar of logplot or right click on it and select Baseline Shift.
Logplot window will be changed to baseline shift window. Now, Baseline Shift form will
be showed when users click on the log track. Check on “Display result in a new track”
if users wish to view the result curve in new log track next to the original one.

127 | P a g e
1. Click Ok, New baseline shift curve is created (*_BLS) and is showed next to the
original curve on the logplot (see figure below).
2. Left click on the place on log track that users want to create the baseline. A
straight baseline will be created. Users can also shape the baseline by clicking on
the logplot to add more shape points.

128 | P a g e
3. Move the baseline left or right to shift the curve. The baseline curve (*_BLS) will
be changed and updated automatically.

4. When finish shifting, user click ( ), Save Result form will be displayed.

129 | P a g e
5. Select dataset to save baseline shift curve.
6. Select or manually enter name for baseline shift curve.
7. Check “create backup curve” if users want to keep the curve when new name for
result curve is existed in this dataset.
8. Click OK to save baseline shift curve and back to logplot window, Continue to
back to baseline shift window or Cancel to cancel shifting process without save.
Merge Curves

The Merge Curves tool in WI allows user to merge curves in depth intervals. Four pre-
defined merge types are available which are Max, Min, Average and Sum.

130 | P a g e
Well: User must choose well before input the data.

Depth Interval: The Top and Bottom boxes allow the user to specify the interval which
the user wants to run.

Input:

 Available curves: This box will contain all the curves in the dataset, when user
wants to merge certain curves together, only to move it into the box Selected
curves.
 Selected curves: This box contains the curve will be merged together. Depth
Start and Depth End are respectively start and end points of the curve that user
want consolidated.

131 | P a g e
Output

 Dataset: is the place where the output curve is saved.


 Output curve: is the name of curve after merge.

Split Curve
The Split Curve tool in WI allows user to split curves in depth intervals.

Well: User must choose well before inputting the data.

Depth Interval: The Top and Bottom boxes allow the user to specify the interval which
the user wants to run.

Input:

132 | P a g e
 Input curve: User must be choice the curve that split.
 Number split: are some sections that are split into from the original curve.

Output

 Output Dataset: is the place where the output curve is saved.


 Curve name: is the name of curve after split.
 Depth Start and Depth End is respectively start and end points of the curve that
user want split.
Curve Header
Edit Curve Header window consists of five tabs: Data set, Current Name, Family, Unit
and Out Name.

Dataset: is the place stored the existing curves. Users can select well/ dataset in the
Well/Dataset tabs.
Current Name: is the name of curve inputed from LAS files.

133 | P a g e
Family:is the group that the selected curve is classified as default. User cannot change
the Family.
Unit: User can customize the unit of the curve.
Out Name: is the name of the output curve and can be customized.

Fill Data Gaps

The Fill Gaps tool in WI allows user to interpolate data in short intervals.

To use Fill Gap feature, users go to Data Processing > Fill Data Gaps. Fill Gaps form
is displayed.

Explanation of Fill Gaps form

Settings area:

Select Well: Users must choose well from available wells in list before input the data.

Input Curve: is the curve which user wants to fill gaps.

134 | P a g e
Top Depth and Bottom Depth: users can manually adjust the top and bottom depth of
data to be filled gaps. Default button can be used to re-set value of Top Depth and
Bottom Depth to default of well.

Null Value’s Number: users can input value for nulls

Gaps Maximum Width: is the maximum distance in the region lack of data that
software can interpolate. User can select the region that is lack of data by Sample or
Meters.

 In sample or In M: users choose type of fill gaps process.


Output area:
 Dataset: users choose dataset to save curve after fill gaps.
 Name: users enter for the name of curve after fill gaps.

Advance (optional):

Select other curves to fill gaps:

WI allows users to add other curves to fill gaps. To use this feature, user press the Load
curves button, select curves form is displayed.

135 | P a g e
 Uses check on the dataset that contains curves want to fill gaps.
 Users check on available curves that want to fill gaps and click Ok.
 Enter the output suffix of filled gaps curves, default is _fg.
 Click Run to begin the process, Click close to close fill gaps form.

Note: The Fill Gaps tool can only interpolate short intervals. In case the interpolated
intervals are long, this tool will not ensure precise results and the user can use Multi-
linear regression ( ) or Neural Network ( ) tools to interpolate.

Curve Rescale

The Rescale Curve window allows user to rescale the wrong-scaled digitized log curve.
The User can also convert count-rate neutron logs to neutron porosity logs.

136 | P a g e
Curve Input: the curve which user want to rescale.

Output Dataset: is the place the output curve saved in.

Curve Output: is the name of curve after rescaling.

Left Scale: the left margin of data set.

Right Scale: the right margin of data set.

The Logarithmic options use the Natural Logarithm of input / output values. After the
Logarithmic box is ticked and the Run button is clicked, the curve will be calculated.

Curve Filter

The Curve Filter window allows user to filter or smooth a curve. Pre-defined filter types
are Square (box) Filter, Bell Filter, Median Filter, Savisky-Golay, Fast Fourie
transform.

137 | P a g e
Explanation of Curve Filter form

Well area:

Select well: User must choose well before filling curve.

Depth Interval: The Top and Bottom boxes allow users to specify the interval over
which the filter will be run, use default button to re-set values to default.

Curve Options area:

Input Curve:

138 | P a g e
o Select the Input Curve you wish to filter. The Output curve name is pre-defined
depending on whether the Create Backup Curve or Create New/Overwrite
Curve check boxes are set.
o With the Create New/Overwrite Curve checked, the output curve will have the
same name as the input curve with a BK appended to it. If the user wishes to
overwrite the input curve, they should edit the output curve name to make it the
same as the input curve name.
o With the Create Backup Curve checked, a backup curve will be copied from
the input curve. The backup curve name can be defined by user.
 Dataset output is the place which the new curve will be saved.

Filter Weights

Number of levels: is the number of factor used to filter (must be the odd number)

 The Square (or box) Filter will apply an equal weight to all samples in the filter.
 The Bell Filter applies a sine wave shaped filter to the data. The following
formula is used to calculate the filter weights.

Where:
Wtj= Filter weight at j'th level
FiltLen = Filter length
 The Median Filter returns the statistical 'median' value for all values sampled in
each filter length.

Curve Convolution
Well Insight provides users “Curve Convolution” feature to create convolution curve
from an input curve.

139 | P a g e
To create convolution curve:

1. To launch “Curve Convolution” feature, users go to menu bar > Data


Processing > Curve Convolution. Curve Convolution form is displayed.

140 | P a g e
Input area:

 Select Well: select well that contains from the list.


 Input Curve: select input curve from the available curves in this well.
 Standard Curve: select a curve in this well to use as standard curve.

Output area:

 Dataset: select a dataset to save the convolution curve.


 Result: users can select a curve to use as output one or manually input a name for
new curve.
2. Click Run to begin the process
3. Click Close to close the form.

141 | P a g e
Curve Deconvolution
Well Insight provides users “Curve Deconvolution” feature to create deconvolution
curve from an input curve.

142 | P a g e
To create deconvolution curve:

1. To launch “Curve Deconvolution” feature, users go to menu bar > Data


Processing > Curve Convolution. Curve Deconvolution form is displayed.

143 | P a g e
Input area:

 Select Well: select well that contains the input curve from the list.
 Input Curve: select input curve from the available curves in this well.
 Standard Curve: select a curve in this well to use as standard curve.

Output area:

 Dataset: select a dataset to save the deconvolution curve.


 Result: users can select a curve to use as output one or manually input a name for
new curve.
2. Click Run to begin the process
3. Click Close to close the form.

144 | P a g e
Curve Derivative
Well Insight provides users “Curve Derivative” feature to create derivative curve from
an input curve.

To create derivative curve:

1. To launch “Curve Derivative” feature, users go to menu bar > Data Processing
> Curve Derivative. Curve Derivative form is displayed.

145 | P a g e
Settings area:

 Select Well: select well that contains the input curve from the list.
 Input Curve: select input curve to derivate.
 Top & Bottom: input top depth and bottom depth of curve to derivate (default:
well depth).
 Default button: change top and bottom depth to default of selected well.

Output area:

 Dataset: select a dataset to save the derivative curve.


 First derivative: input name for first degree derivative output curve.
 Second derivative: input name for second degree derivative output curve
(available when user check  Output second derivative)
2. Click Run to begin the process
3. Click Close to close the form.

Result:

146 | P a g e
147 | P a g e
Curve Average

The Curve Average tool in WI allows user to calculate average data in depth intervals.
Two pre-defined average types are available which are Lateral Average and Arithmetic
Average.

148 | P a g e
Well: User must choose well before inputting the data.

Depth Interval: The Top and Bottom boxes allow the user to specify the interval which
the user wants to run.

Input:

 Lateral Average or Arithmetic Average: The user selects the type of


averaging that will be applied to the chosen curves. The arithmetic average
takes a straight average of the input curves at each well step depth. The
Lateral Average can give better results since it gives a median-type average
that will not be badly skewed by any outliers in the data.
 Curve Search Mask: allows the program to select the input curves using a
mask. This is useful if the input curves have nearly the same name except for
149 | P a g e
one or two character. For example, if the user wanted to select the following
curves RLA1 RLA2, RLA3, RLA4, RLA4, then the user would enter RLA* in
the Curve search mask box and click Apply.
 Available Curve: is a table contains full set of available curves.
 Select Curve: The user selects the input curves from which the average is
calculated. The number of curves may reach ten curves.
 Output Dataset: is the place where the output curve is saved.
 Output curve: is the name of curve after average calculating.

Curve Comparison
Curve Comparison tool in WI allows user compares between the input data or the input
data and output data curve.

150 | P a g e
Well: Well must be chosen before doing curve comparison.
Depth interval: The Top Depth and Bottom Depth boxes allow the user to specify the
interval over which the comparison will be run.
Use Zone: Use can make curve comparison by depth interval or zone. If zone box is
ticked, user must select Parameter Name and Zone Set. After Parameter Name and
Zone Set are chosen, the table containing information such as Name, Top, Bottom,
Color will light up. For zones that the use wants to active, the user just need to check the
boxes on the Use column.
In Curve Comparison
Curve 1 and Curve 2 which are the 2 curves need comparison. User just needs to select
the curve in the drop-down list. The difference and the correlation between the two

151 | P a g e
curves will be represented by numbers and are automatically calculated by WI software.
The more similar two curves are, the higher correlation number is and the lower the
difference number is.

Formation Resistivity
Well Insight provides “Formation Resistivity” feature which allows users to calculate
the formation resistivity from temperature and salinity of zones.

To use Formation Resistivity feature:

1. Launch Formation Resistivity by going to menu bar > Data Processing >
Formation Resistivity. Formation Resistivity form is displayed.

Input area:
 Well: select input well from the list

152 | P a g e
 Zoneset: select zone set from available zone sets in the input well
 Temperature: select temperature curve.
 Unit: select temperature unit, (oC or oF).
Parameters table:
 Zone name column: name of zones in the zone set.
 Top & Bottom: Top depth and Bottom depth of zones.
 Salinity: salinity input area for each zones.
Output area:
 Dataset: select output data set from available sets in the input well.
 Name: select output curve name or manually enter name for a new one.
2. How to calculate Formation Resistivity:

3. Result curve:

153 | P a g e
Bad hole/Coal/Salt
Well Insight provides “Bad hole/Coal/Salt” feature which helps users to identify bad
hole, coal or salt period in well.

To use Bad hole/coal/salt feature:

1. Launch Bad hole/coal/salt by going to menu bar > Data Processing > Bad
hole/coal/salt. Bad hole/coal/salt form is displayed.

154 | P a g e
Input area:

 Well: select input well from the list


 Zoneset: select zone set from available zone sets in the input well
 Bad Hole Discr: bad hole discriminator, select curve to use as
discriminator for bad hole.
 Density: density curve.
 Neutron: neutron curve.
 Sonic: sonic curve.
Parameters table:
 Zone column: name of zones in the zone set.
 Depth, Top & Bottom column: Top depth and Bottom depth of zones.
 Coal & Salt: discriminator value of Density, Neutron, Sonic. Default
(1.8, 0.5, 120).
 Salt: discriminator value of Density, Neutron, Sonic. Default (2.04, 0,
67).

155 | P a g e
 Bad Hole, Discr Min & Max: minimum and maximum discriminator
value of selected curve.
Output area:
 Dataset: select output data set from available sets in the input well.
 Bad hole, Coal, Salt: names of output curves for bad hole, coal and
salt.

How to identify Bad hole/coal/salt:

Result:

156 | P a g e
157 | P a g e
Chapter 10: User Formulas
 User Formula
 User Program
 API Functions

User Formula

The User Formula window can be used to manipulate conventional single dimensional
curve and multi-dimensional array curve data, either:

 Using a simple one-line-formula format, or


 Incorporating various discriminator and if / then / else logic statements as part of
the computation
The tool can be easily used to fix values, or to calculate a complex formula.
Discriminators can be used to limit the depth range that needs calculating. When naming
the curve in the formula, single letter should be avoided.

158 | P a g e
The following functions are available:

* Multiply
+ Add
- Subtract
/ Divide
^ Raise to power – x^y

Clip Resultant Curves: The Clip Resultant curves check box can be used to clip the
output Result Curve maximum and minimum values to within user-defined limits.

The Minimum value and Maximum Value text entry boxes are only active when this
check box is checked.

159 | P a g e
Result Curve: The Result Curve list box allows the user to select an output curve to
write the computation results to, from the existing curve list. Alternatively, the user can
type in a curve name for the Result Curve.

Auto Save: The Auto Save box, if user check will automatically save all used formula to
an external.ufm file when the Run button is clicked. The user can define name of the
.ufm file/ will be named using the Result Curve name.

The Top and Bottom depths over which to run the computation, if left blank will default
to the entire well depth range. The user can manually type in depth values. Computation
depth ranges can also be used by clicking on the ( ) button.
After define parameters, user can save ( ) the designed form as .ufm file format.
If user has already had .ufm file format, user can load into WI and all defined parameters
will be shown.
If user wants to delete all parameters, he/she just need to click on the Clear button.

User Program
To use user program in Well Insight:

- Go to Menu bar > Data Processing > Select User Program. User Program
form is displayed.

Explanation of components in User Program form:

160 | P a g e
Depth Interval area:

- Select Well: This is used to select a well for depth interval


- Top: This is to defined the measured depth at the top of the well
- Bottom: This is to defined the measured depth at the bottom of the well
- Default button: This button is used to reset the default parameters of depth
interval
- Use advance mode C# checkbox: This option will give the users the ability of
using more advance C# elements and more ability to control the software by using
user program.

Program Editor area:

- Left area: the list of current user-made or system-made functions that is available
to use in C# code on the right side

161 | P a g e
- Edit Library button: This button is used to open an edit library form to edit the
function in the left area.
- Right area: the area for C# code, comment are colored as green, there are list
numbers, the main elements of code is colored blue, the rest is black.

Error area:

- This area is used to show the errors (If there is any) in the C# code

Buttons area:

- Load template button: this button is used to load the C# defined template in
Program Editor area
- Load button: this button is used to open the file explorer and load the code that
you have saved using User Program
- Save button: this button is used to save the C# code in the Program Editor area in
the format .prog
- Clear button: this button is used to clear the C# code in the Program Editor
- Running area: this show the progress of running the C# code
- Run button: this button is used to execute the C# code
- Close button: this button is used to close the User Program form

Explanation of components in Edit Library form

162 | P a g e
Functions area:
- This area list the current functions that is already made by users for edit and
modify
- Edit button: This button is used to modify a particular function
- Delete button: This button is used to delete a particular function
Message area:
- If there is any error, the system will show the error in this area
Right area:
- Function area:
o Name text box: This is used to modify the name of the function
o Return type combo box: This combo box is used to select the return type of
the function, whether it returns an integer value or float or double value.
- Parameter area:
o Name text box: This is used to modify the name of the parameters of the
function

163 | P a g e
o Type combo box: This is used to choose the type of parameters, either
integer, float or double type
o Parameter list: This shows all the parameters that has been defined
o Add button: This button is used to add the parameter to the function, it will
be shown in the parameter list
o Update button: This button is used to update a parameter in the parameter
list.
o Delete button: This button is used to delete a parameter in the parameter list
- Comment textbox: this comment textbox is used to define the comment about the
function, to say what the function is about, what it does.
- Function signature: This area is to show the function main elements after
defining the function type, parameters
- Code area: place to write your own code for that function

Button area:

- Compile button: this button is used for the software to read the code to see if there
is any error
- Apply button: this button is used to apply and save function that users just made

Close button: this button is used to close the Edit Library form.

API Functions
 Well Insight structure of database support

Well Insight support users to use C# code and doing calculation for their petrophysical
work. Developer of Well Insight has made a powerful system that allows users to do
almost anything with their petrophysical work by using their own calculation method in
interpretation.

 API Functions:

164 | P a g e
The details and example of using Well Insight API:

Get All Wells


GetAllWells()

Return: String[]

When this API is used, it will return all wells in a project. It returns a string array of well
name in the project.

Examples:

// Get all wells and show well names by messagebox


namespace WellInsightBuilder
{
class CompileBuilder
{
public static bool main()
{
//Add your code here
string[] wells = Libs.GetAllWells();
//loop for each well
foreach(string well in wells)
{
MessageBox.Show("Well: " + well);
}
return true;
}
//Define your method here
}
}

165 | P a g e
Get All Wells By Group
GetAllWellsByGroup(String GroupName)

Return: String[]

Parameters: String GroupName, GroupName is the name of the group that you made in
the datatree

When this API is used, it will return all wells in a group that you defined. It returns a
string array of well name in the group of the project

Examples:

// Get all wells by group and show by messagebox


namespace WellInsightBuilder
{
class CompileBuilder
{
public static bool main()
{
//Add your code here
string group = "Group1";
string[] wells = Libs.GetAllWellsByGroup(group);
//loop for each well
foreach(string well in wells)
{
MessageBox.Show("Well: " + well);
}
return true;
}
166 | P a g e
//Define your method here
}
}

Get All Datasets


GetAllDatasets(String wellName)

Return: String[]

Parameters: String wellName, wellName is the name of the well that you want to get all
the datasets

When this API is used, it will return all dataset in a well that you defined. It returns a
string array of dataset from the well you defined.

Examples:

// Get all datasets and show by messagebox


namespace WellInsightBuilder
{
class CompileBuilder
{
public static bool main()
{
//Add your code here
string group = "Group1";
string[] wells = Libs.GetAllWellsByGroup(group);
//loop for each well
foreach(string well in wells)
{
string[] datasets = Libs.GetAllDatasets(well);
167 | P a g e
foreach(string dataset in datasets )
{
MessageBox.Show("Dataset: " + dataset);
}
}
return true;
}
//Define your method here
}
}

Check Exist Dataset


CheckExistDataset(String wellName, String datasetName)

Return: bool

Parameters: String wellName, the well name that you want to check dataset. String
datasetName, the dataset name that we want to check if it exist

When this API is used, it will return true or false, true is when the dataset you defined
existed, false is when it is not existed.

Example:

// check dataset exists or not and show by messagebox


namespace WellInsightBuilder
{
class CompileBuilder
{
public static bool main()
{
168 | P a g e
//Check curve exist, Show yes if exist, no if not.
string group = "Group1";
string[] wells = Libs.GetAllWellsByGroup(group);
foreach (string well in wells)
{
string[] datasets = Libs.GetAllDatasets(well);
foreach (string dataset in datasets)
{
bool result = Libs.CheckExistDataset(well,
"Data_Input");
if (result)
{
MessageBox.Show("datasetExist" + " yes");
}
else
{
MessageBox.Show("datasetExist:" + " no");
}
}
}
return true;
}
//Define your method here
}
}

Create Dataset
CreateDataset(String wellName, String datasetName)

169 | P a g e
Return: bool

Parameters: String wellName, the well name that you want to create dataset. String
datasetName, the dataset name that we want to create.

When this API is used, it will create a dataset with provided name. It will return true or
false

Example:

//create dataset in wells in group.


namespace WellInsightBuilder
{
class CompileBuilder
{
public static bool main()
{
//Check curve exist, Show yes if exist, no if not.
string group = "Group1";
string[] wells = Libs.GetAllWellsByGroup(group);
foreach (string well in wells)
{
string[] datasets = Libs.GetAllDatasets(well);
foreach (string dataset in datasets)
{
Libs.CreateDataset(well, "TestDataset");
}
}
return true;
}

170 | P a g e
//Define your method here
}

Delete Dataset
DeleteDataset(String wellName, String datasetName)

Return: bool

Parameters: String wellName, the well name that you want to delete dataset in. String
datasetName, the dataset name that we want to delete.

When this API is used, it will return true of false. When it return true, the dataset which is
provided with name is deleted, when it return false, the dataset which is provided with
name is not deleted.

Example:

namespace WellInsightBuilder
{
class CompileBuilder
{
public static bool main()
{
string group = "Group1";
string[] wells = Libs.GetAllWellsByGroup(group);
foreach (string well in wells)
{
string[] datasets = Libs.GetAllDatasets(well);
foreach (string dataset in datasets)
{

171 | P a g e
Libs.DeleteDataset(well, "TestDataset");
}
}
return true;
}
//Define your method here
}
}

Get All Curves


GetAllCurves(String wellName, String datasetName)

Return: String[]

Parameters: String wellName, the well name that you want to get all curves. String
datasetName, the dataset name that we want to get all curves in the specific dataset

When this API is used, it will return a string array of curve name. This is all curves in a
specific dataset

Example:

//get all curves in a dataset, in a well and show by messagebox


namespace WellInsightBuilder
{
class CompileBuilder
{
public static bool main()
{
//Add your code here

172 | P a g e
string[] curves = Libs.GetAllCurves("Well_demo_full", "data");
String sumStr="";
foreach (string curve in curves)
{
sumStr += "Curves :" +curve + "\n";
}
MessageBox.Show (sumStr );

return true;
}
//Define your method here
}
}

Get All Curves By Alias


GetAllCurvesByAlias(String wellName, String datasetName, String aliasName)

Return: String[]

Parameters: String wellName, the well name that you want to get all curves from. String
datasetName, the dataset name that we want to get all curves from; String aliasName, the
alias that we want to get all curves from.

When this API is used, it will return all curves in specific dataset and alias, it will return a
string array of curve name

Example:
//get all curves by alias
namespace WellInsightBuilder

173 | P a g e
{
class CompileBuilder
{
public static bool main()
{
//Add your code here
string[] curves = Libs.GetAllCurvesByAlias("Well_demo_full",
"data", "gr");
foreach (string curve in curves)
MessageBox.Show ("Curves :" +curve);

return true;
}
//Define your method here
}
}

Create Blank Curve


CreateBlankCurve(String wellName)

Return: WICurve

Parameters: String wellName, the well name that you want to create a blank curve from.

When this API is used, it will return a WICurve type. It will created a new curve with
blank data

Example:

174 | P a g e
//create blank curve
namespace WellInsightBuilder
{
class CompileBuilder
{
public static bool main()
{
//Add your code here
string group = "Group1";
string[] wells = Libs.GetAllWellsByGroup(group);
foreach (string well in wells)
{
Libs.CreateBlankCurve(well);
}
return true;
}
//Define your method here
}
}

Save Curve
SaveCurve(WICurve essCurveSave, String wellName, String datasetName, String
curveName)

Return: bool

Parameters: WICurve essCurveSave, this will take the curve “essCurveSave” that we
defined as input; String wellName, this is the well that we want to save the curve

175 | P a g e
mentioned to; String datasetName, this is the dataset that we want to save the curve
mentioned to; String curveName, this will define the name of the curve that we save.

When this API is used, it will save the WICurve that we defined as input to the database.
The function will return either true or false, which mean that the operation is successful
or not.

Example:
//create blank curve, save curve
namespace WellInsightBuilder
{
class CompileBuilder
{
public static bool main()
{
//create a curve name M in every dataset of every well in Group1
string group = "Group1";
string[] wells = Libs.GetAllWellsByGroup(group);
foreach (string well in wells)
{
string[] datasets = Libs.GetAllDatasets(well);
foreach (string dataset in datasets)
{
WICurve m = Libs.CreateBlankCurve(well);
Libs.SaveCurve( m, well, dataset, "M");
}
}
return true;
}
//Define your method here

176 | P a g e
}
}

Delete Curve
DeleteCurve(String wellName, String datasetName, String curveName)

Return: bool

Parameters: String wellName, this take the well by name as input parameters, String
datasetName, this is the dataset that we want to delete a curve in, String curveName, this
is the name of the curve that we want to delete.

When this API is used, it will delete the defined curve in the dataset and the well we
defined. The function will return either true or false, which mean that the operation is
successful or not.

Example:
//delete curve name M in every dataset of every well in Group1
namespace WellInsightBuilder
{
class CompileBuilder
{
public static bool main()
{
string group = "Group1";
string[] wells = Libs.GetAllWellsByGroup(group);
foreach (string well in wells)
{
string[] datasets = Libs.GetAllDatasets(well);

177 | P a g e
foreach (string dataset in datasets)
{
Libs.DeleteCurve(well, dataset, "GR");
}
}
return true;
}
//Define your method here
}
}

Check Exist Curve


CheckExistCurve(String wellName, String datasetName, String curveName)

Return: bool

Parameters: String wellName, this take the name of the well to check for whether the
curve is existed or not, String datasetName, this take the name of the dataset to check for
if the curve is existed or not, String curveName, this take the name of the curve that we
want to check if it is existed .

When this API is used, it will return either true or false; when it shows true, the curve is
existed; when it shows false, the curve is not existed.

Example:
//Check curve exist, Show yes if exist, no if not.

namespace WellInsightBuilder
{

178 | P a g e
class CompileBuilder
{
public static bool main()
{
string group = "Group1";
string[] wells = Libs.GetAllWellsByGroup(group);
foreach (string well in wells)
{
string[] datasets = Libs.GetAllDatasets(well);
foreach (string dataset in datasets)
{
bool result = Libs.CheckExistCurve(well, dataset,
"GR");
if (result)
{
MessageBox.Show("CurveExist" + " yes");
}
else
{
MessageBox.Show("CurveExist:" + " no");
}
}
}
return true;
}
//Define your method here
}
}

179 | P a g e
Load Curve
LoadCurve(String wellName, String datasetName, String curveName)

Return: WICurve

Parameters: String wellName, this take the name of the well that we want to load the
curve from; String datasetName, this take the name of the dataset that we want to load the
curve from; String curveName, this identify the name of the curve that we want to load.

When this API is used, it will return a WICurve object that can be defined as curve in the
program

Example:
//Load curve and save curve
namespace WellInsightBuilder
{
class CompileBuilder
{
public static bool main()
{
string group = "Group1";
string[] wells = Libs.GetAllWellsByGroup(group);
foreach (string well in wells)
{
string[] datasets = Libs.GetAllDatasets(well);
foreach (string dataset in datasets)
{
WICurve GRnew = Libs.CreateBlankCurve(well);
WICurve GR = Libs.LoadCurve(well, dataset, "GR");
int i;

180 | P a g e
for (i = GR.StartIndex; i < GR.EndIndex; i++)
{
double GRValue = GR.Values[i];
GRnew.Values[i] = GRValue + 1;
}
Libs.SaveCurve(GRnew, well, dataset, "Grnew");
}
}
return true;
}

//Define your method here


}
}

Set Alias
SetAlias(WICurve essCurve, String aliasName)

Return: bool

Parameters: WICurve essCurve, this take the curve (essCurve) that we defined as input;
String aliasName, we need to define alias name for the curve that we want to set it alias.

When this API is used, it will return true or false, which mean the operation success or
not. This function will set an alias name for the curve we defined.

Example:
namespace WellInsightBuilder
{
class CompileBuilder

181 | P a g e
{
public static bool main()
{
//set alias for GR curve
string group = "Group1";
string[] wells = Libs.GetAllWellsByGroup(group);
foreach (string well in wells)
{
string[] datasets = Libs.GetAllDatasets(well);
foreach (string dataset in datasets)
{
WICurve GR = Libs.LoadCurve(well, dataset, "GR");
Libs.SetAlias(GR,"egr");
Libs.SaveCurve(GR, well, dataset, "GR");
}

}
return true;
}
//Define your method here
}
}

Copy Family
CopyFamily(WICurve essCurveSource, WICurve essCurveDest)

Return: bool

182 | P a g e
Parameters: WICurve essCurveSource, this take the curve that we want to copy the
family from; WICurve essCurveDest, this take the curve that we want to copy the family
to.

When this API is used, it will return true or false, which mean the operation success or
not. This function will copy the family from “essCurveSource” to “essCurveDest”

Example:
//copy family
namespace WellInsightBuilder
{
class CompileBuilder
{
public static bool main()
{
//set alias for GR curve
string group = "Group1";
string[] wells = Libs.GetAllWellsByGroup(group);
foreach (string well in wells)
{
string[] datasets = Libs.GetAllDatasets(well);
foreach (string dataset in datasets)
{
WICurve DT = Libs.LoadCurve(well, dataset, "DT");
WICurve GR = Libs.LoadCurve(well, dataset, "GR");
Libs.CopyFamily(DT, GR);
Libs.SaveCurve(GR, well, dataset, "GR");
}

183 | P a g e
return true;
}
//Define your method here
}
}

Get Well Information To Array


GetWellInformationToArray(String wellName)

Return: String[]

Parameters: String wellName, this take the name of the well that we need information

When this API is used, it will return the information of the well as String array.

Example:

//get well inf to array and show by messagebox


namespace WellInsightBuilder
{
class CompileBuilder
{
public static bool main()
{
//Add your code here
String[]arr=Libs.GetWellInformationToArray("Well_demo_full");
String sumStr="";
if(arr!=null && arr.Length>0)
{

184 | P a g e
for(int i=0;i<arr.Length;i++)
{
sumStr+="field "+ i + " " + arr[i]+"\t";
if(i%5==0)
sumStr+="\n";
}
// Displays the MessageBox.

MessageBox.Show(sumStr, "test");
}

return true;
}
//Define your method here
}
}

Get Well Information To Key


GetWellInformationToKey(String wellName, String keyIdentify)

Return: String[]

Parameters: String wellName, this take the name of the well that we need information
such as long, lat, author, location; String keyIdentify, this take the information that we
want to retrieve such as long, lat, author, location

When this API is used, it will return the information of the well as String array.

Example:

185 | P a g e
// get well inf by key
namespace WellInsightBuilder
{
class CompileBuilder
{
public static bool main()
{
//Add your code here
String
str=Libs.GetWellInformationToKey("100131207811W600","Long");
DialogResult result;

// Displays the MessageBox.

result = MessageBox.Show("field 0:" +str, "test");

return true;
}
//Define your method here
}
}

Get Well Information To Object


GetWellInformationToObject(String wellName)

Return: WIWellHeader

186 | P a g e
Parameters: String wellName, this take the name of the well that we need information
such as long, lat, author, location.

When this API is used, it will return the information of the well as an object
WIWellHeader.

Example:

//get well inf to object


namespace WellInsightBuilder
{
class CompileBuilder
{
public static bool main()
{
//Add your code here
WIWellHeader
wellHead=Libs.GetWellInformationToObject("Well_demo_full");
String sumStr="";
if(wellHead!=null)
{
sumStr += "Author: " + wellHead.Author + "\n";
sumStr += "Lat: " + wellHead.Latitude + "\n";
sumStr += "Lon: " + wellHead.Longitude + "\n";

// Displays the MessageBox.


MessageBox.Show(sumStr, "test");
}

return true;

187 | P a g e
}
//Define your method here
}
}

Get All ZoneSets


GetAllZoneSets(String wellName)

Return: WIZoneSet[]

Parameters: String wellName, this take the name of the well that we want to get all zone
set from.

When this API is used, it will return all zone sets of the well as an array WIZoneSet[].

Example:

//get all zonesets


namespace WellInsightBuilder
{
class CompileBuilder
{
public static bool main()
{
//Add your code here
WIZoneSet[] arrZoneset =Libs.GetAllZoneSets("Well_demo_full");
if(arrZoneset!=null && arrZoneset.Length>0)
{
WIZoneSet zs = arrZoneset[0];

188 | P a g e
String sumStr="";
sumStr += "Name: " + zs.Name + "\n";
sumStr += "Type: " + zs.TypeZone + "\n";
MessageBox.Show(sumStr, "test");
}
// Displays the MessageBox.

return true;
}
//Define your method here
}
}

Get All Zones


GetAllZones(String wellName, WIZoneSet zoneSet)

Return: WIZone[]

Parameters: String wellName, this take the name of the well that we want to get all zones
from; WIZoneSet zoneSet, this define a zone set that we want to get all zones from.

When this API is used, it will return WIZone[] which is an array containing all the zone
from the well that we defined.

Example:

namespace WellInsightBuilder
{
class CompileBuilder

189 | P a g e
{
public static bool main()
{
//Add your code here
WIZoneSet[] arrZoneset =Libs.GetAllZoneSets("Well_demo_full");
if(arrZoneset!=null && arrZoneset.Length>0)
{
WIZoneSet zs = arrZoneset[0];
WIZone[] arrZone =Libs.GetAllZones("Well_demo_full",
zs);
if(arrZone!=null && arrZone.Length>0)
{
WIZone z = arrZone[0];
String sumStr="";
sumStr += "Name: " + z.Name + "\n";
sumStr += "Top: " + z.Top_Depth + "\n";
sumStr += "Bottom: " + z.Bottom_Depth + "\n";
MessageBox.Show(sumStr, "test");
}
}
// Displays the MessageBox.

return true;
}
//Define your method here
}
}

190 | P a g e
Depth to Index
Depth2Index(String wellName, double depth)

Return: int

Parameters: String wellName, this take the name of the well that we want to convert
depth to index in that well. double depth, this take the depth that we want to convert to
index for that well

When this API is used, it will return an index number (Integer) of corresponding depth in
that well.

Example:

//depth to index
namespace WellInsightBuilder
{
class CompileBuilder
{
public static bool main()
{
//Add your code here
double depth = 3300.0;
int index =Libs.Depth2Index("Well_demo_full", depth);
String sumStr="";
sumStr += "Depth: " + depth + "\n";
sumStr += "Index: " + index + "\n";
// Displays the MessageBox.

MessageBox.Show(sumStr, "test");

191 | P a g e
return true;
}
//Define your method here
}
}

Export Single Well Data Ascii


ExportSingleWellDataAsc(String path, String wellName, double startDepth, double
endDepth, bool exportWell, bool exportUWI, String strListCurve, String
strListAlias, String strListZoneset)

Return: bool

Parameters: String path, this take the path that we want to export single well data to ascii
file; String wellName, this take the name of the well; double startDepth, the start of
depth; Double endDepth, the end of Depth; bool exportWell, this identify whether well
information is exported or not; bool exportUWI, this identify whether UWI will be
exported or not; String strListCurve, this identify a list of curve to export, curves are
separated by comma, it will export all if this is null; String strListAlias, this identify a list
of alias to export, aliases are separated by comma, it is not used if null; String
strListZoneset, this identify a list of zoneset to export, zonesets are separated by comma,
it is not use if null.

When this API is used, it will export single well that we identified to ascii file.

Example:

192 | P a g e
//defind using library here
using System.IO;
using System.Diagnostics;
//DO NOT change namespace, class name
namespace WellInsightBuilder
{
class CompileBuilder
{
public static bool main()
{
//Add your code here
// Syntax
String fileName = "D:\\abc.asc";
Libs.ExportSingleWellDataAsc("D:\\ESS_1X.asc", "ESS_1X",1000,
2000, false, false,"", "", "");
string argument = @"/select, " +fileName;
Process.Start("explorer.exe", argument);
return true;
}// save file on D:\\
//Define your method here

}
}

193 | P a g e
Export Single Well Data Csv
ExportSingleWellDataCsv(String path, String wellName, double startDepth, double
endDepth, bool exportWell, bool exportUWI, String strListCurve, String
strListAlias, String strListZoneset)

Return: bool

Parameters: String path, this take the path that we want to export single well data to csv
file; String wellName, this take the name of the well; double startDepth, the start of
depth; Double endDepth, the end of Depth; bool exportWell, this identify whether well
information is exported or not; bool exportUWI, this identify whether UWI will be
exported or not; String strListCurve, this identify a list of curve to export, curves are
separated by comma, it will export all if this is null; String strListAlias, this identify a list
of alias to export, aliases are separated by comma, it is not used if null; String
strListZoneset, this identify a list of zoneset to export, zonesets are separated by comma,
it is not used if null.

When this API is used, it will export single well that identified to csv file.

Example:

//defind using library here


using System.IO;
using System.Diagnostics;
//DO NOT change namespace, class name
namespace WellInsightBuilder
{
class CompileBuilder

194 | P a g e
{
public static bool main()
{
//Add your code here
String fileName = "D:\\abc.asc";
Libs.ExportSingleWellDataCsv("D:\\ESS_2X.csv", "ESS_2X",0,
00, false, false,"", "", "");
string argument = @"/select, " +fileName;
Process.Start("explorer.exe", argument);
return true;
}// save file on D:
//Define your method here

}
}

Export Multi Well Data Ascii


ExportMultiWellDataAsc(String path, String strListWellName, bool exportWell,
bool exportUWI, String strListCurve, String strListAlias, String strListZoneset)

Return: bool
Parameters: String path, this take the path that we want to export multi well data to ascii
file; String strListWellName, this take the name of the well list that we want to export;
bool exportWell, this identify whether well information is exported or not; bool
exportUWI, this identify whether UWI will be exported or not; String strListCurve, this
identify a list of curve to export, curves are separated by comma, it will export all if this
is null; String strListAlias, this identify a list of alias to export, aliases are separated by

195 | P a g e
comma, it is not used if null; String strListZoneset, this identify a list of zoneset to
export, zonesets are separated by comma, it is not used if null.

When this API is used, it will export multi well that identified to ascii file.

Example:

//defind using library here


using System.IO;
using System.Diagnostics;
//DO NOT change namespace, class name
namespace WellInsightBuilder
{
class CompileBuilder
{
public static bool main()
{
//Add your code here
String fileName = "D:\\abc.asc";
Libs.ExportMultiWellDataAsc(“D:\\ESS_1X_M.asc",,
"ESS_1X,ESS_2X", true, false, "", "", "");
string argument = @"/select, " +fileName;
Process.Start("explorer.exe", argument);
return true;
}// save file on D:\\
//Define your method here

}
}

196 | P a g e
Export Multi Well Data Csv
ExportMultiWellDataCsv(String path, String strListWellName, bool exportWell,
bool exportUWI, String strListCurve, String strListAlias, String strListZoneset)

Return: bool
Parameters: String path, this take the path that we want to export multi well data to csv
file; String strListWellName, this take the name of the well list that we want to export;
bool exportWell, this identify whether well information is exported or not; bool
exportUWI, this identify whether UWI will be exported or not; String strListCurve, this
identify a list of curve to export, curves are separated by comma, it will export all if this
is null; String strListAlias, this identify a list of alias to export, aliases are separated by
comma, it is not used if null; String strListZoneset, this identify a list of zoneset to
export, zonesets are separated by comma, it is not used if null.
When this API is used, it will export multi well that identified to csv file.
Example:

//defind using library here


using System.IO;
using System.Diagnostics;
//DO NOT change namespace, class name
namespace WellInsightBuilder
{
class CompileBuilder
{
public static bool main()
{
//Add your code here

197 | P a g e
String fileName = "D:\\abc.asc";
Libs.ExportMultiWellDataCsv("D:\\Test_2.csv",
"ESS_3X,ESS_2X", true, false, "", "", "");
string argument = @"/select, " +fileName;
Process.Start("explorer.exe", argument);
return true;
}// save file on D:\\
//Define your method here

}
}

WICurve properties
WICurve.GetValues: get the value array of curve

WICurve.SetValues: set the value array of curve

WICurve.GetDepths: get the depth array of curve

WICurve.SetDepths: set the depth array of curve

WICurve.GetAlias: get the curve alias

WICurve.SetAlias: set the curve alias

WICurve.GetStep: get the step (sample rate) of the curve

WICurve.GetStartIndex: get the start index of the curve array

198 | P a g e
WICurve.GetEndIndex: get the end index of the curve array

WICurve.SetUnit: set the unit for the curve

WICurve.GetUnit: get the unit for the curve

199 | P a g e
Chapter 11: Calculation
 TVD Conversion
 Multi Linear Regression
 Neural Network

TVD Conversion
WELL-INSIGHT provides user TVD conversion tool to convert from survey file or curve
to True Vertical Depth (TVD).

To do a TVD conversion, users go to menu bar > Data Processing > TVD Conversion.
TVD conversion form is displayed.

200 | P a g e
Explanation of TVD conversion form

Well area:

 Select well: select well in list to compute TVD.


 Dataset: select dataset that TVD output curve will be saved to.
 Top Depth, Bottom Depth, Step: depths and step of selected well.

WI allows users compute TVD by using survey file or using curves.

 Check using survey file to compute TVD from a survey file, use browse button to
locate survey file (*txt).
 Check using curve to compute TVD from curves, select Deviation curve and
Azimuth curve from list to use this mode.

Table structure area:

 Data start at line: users enter the start line of data, default is 0.
 Depth is in column: users enter number for depth column, default is 1.
 Deviation is in column: users enter number for Deviation column, default is 2.

201 | P a g e
 Azimuth is in column: users enter number for Azimuth column, default is 3.
 Well depth reference: uses input for well depth reference, default is 0.
 TVD reference at: uses input for TVD reference.
 X at ref. depth: uses input for X reference depth, default is 0.
 Y at ref. depth: uses input for Y reference depth, default is 0.

WI supports four methods to compute TVD

 Average Angle: The direction between two stations is assumed to be the average
of the direction at each station.
 Balanced Tangential: The hole is assumed to have a direction the same as the
upper station for half the interval between the stations and a direction the same as
the lower station for the lower half.
 Radius Curvature: A spherical arc is generated that passes through the two
stations at the measured station angles.
 Minimum Curvature: A circular arc is generated between the stations with a
minimum curvature but still being tangential to the borehole at the two stations.

Input table consists of four columns: Index, Depth, Deviation, Azimuth shows consistent
information of input file or curve.

Preview and output tables: show preview input and output curves.

After input data, user click Run to compute TVD, the result will be showed in the
preview table, users then have to click Save to save output curve into selected dataset.

Multiple Linear Regression


The Multiple Linear Regression tool in WI allows user to interpolate data in the
intervals.

202 | P a g e
The Input Tab:

203 | P a g e
 The Top Depth and Bottom Depth boxes allow the user to specify the interval
which the user wants to run.
 Curve to Predict: is the curve which needs to predict.
 Curve Input: is the curve which using calculation.

204 | P a g e
The Discriminators Tab:

 Value/ Curve: Select the curve name/value that user want to add in the
discriminators table. The curve name can be typed or selected from a drop-down
box.
 Func: Stands for the function, users can customize the functions: >, >=, =, =< or
<.
 Combine with: or, and.

205 | P a g e
The Build Model Tab:

 The Top Depth and Bottom Depth boxes allow the user to specify the interval
which the user wants to run.
 Total Number of data point: the total calculated values points in depth interval.
 R2: is the correlation of the prediction curve with the curve using as input data.

206 | P a g e
Run Model Tab:

Well: Well must be chosen before using calculate curve.

The Top Depth and Bottom Depth boxes allow the user to specify the interval over
which input data will be run.

Dataset: is the place where the output curve is saved.

Curve name: is the name of curve after calculating.

Minimum Value and Maximum Value are of the curve after calculating.

After set up the parameter of Multiple Linear Regression, User needs to click Run.

Click “Close” button to Close Multi Linear Regression form.

207 | P a g e
Neural Network
Artificial Neural Network (ANN) is the most effective module to predict missing
curves. WI supports the latest ANN version helping users to maximize interpretation
results.

Input

Well: Well must be chosen before using ANN module.

Depth interval: The Top Depth and Bottom Depth boxes allow the user to specify the
interval over which input data will be run.

Use Zone: Use can make curve comparison by depth interval or zone. If zone box is
ticked, user must select Parameter Name and Zone Set. After Parameter Name and

208 | P a g e
Zone Set are chosen, the containing information table such as Name, Top, Bottom,
Color will light up. For zones that the use wants to active, the user just need to check the
boxes on the Use column.

Input Curve: the curves are used to training the ANN.

Output Curve: curves are the results after running the ANN.

After setting up the parameter of ANN. User needs to click Prepare Data.

Training

209 | P a g e
# of Layer : Number of layers = Input (1) + Hidden (1 to 3) + Output (1)so there is a
minimum of 3 layers with 1 hidden layer and a maximum of 5 layers with 3 hidden
layers. (Rem.: fannlib supports even more hidden layers but there is no need for it).

Hid.layer : is the number hidden layer

Training Method : You can choose one of the following training algorithms:

FANN_TRAIN_INCREMENTAL: Standard back propagation algorithm in pattern


mode: the weights are updated after each training pattern. This means that the weights
are updated many times during a single epoch. For this reason some problems, will train
very fast with this algorithm, while other more advanced problems will not train very
well.

FANN_TRAIN_BATCH: Standard back propagation algorithm in batch mode: the


weights are updated after calculating the mean square error for the whole training set.
This means that the weights are only updated once during an epoch. This raises the
problem the algorithm will converge slower. But since the mean square error is calculated
more correctly than in incremental training, some problems will reach a better solutions
with this algorithm.

FANN_TRAIN_RPROP: A more advanced batch training algorithm which achieves


good results for most problems. The RPROP training algorithm is adaptive, and does
therefore not use a fixed learning rate. Some other parameters can however be set to
change the way the RPROP algorithm works, but it is only recommended for users with
insight in how the RPROP training algorithm works. The RPROP training algorithm is
described by [Riedmiller and Braun, 1993], but the actual learning algorithm used here is
the iRPROP- training algorithm which is described by [Igel and Husken, 2000] which is a
various of the standard RPROP training algorithm.

FANN_TRAIN_QUICKPROP: A more advanced batch training algorithm which


achieves good results for many problems. The quick propagation (quick prop) training

210 | P a g e
algorithm uses the learning rate parameter along with other more advanced parameters,
but it is recommended to change these advanced parameters by users with insight in how
the quick prop training algorithm works only. The quick prop training algorithm is
described by [Fahlman, 1988].

Activation Function Hidden: Hidden Layer Activation Function.

Activation Function Output: Output Layer Activation Function.

The graphic below shows a sketch of the sigmoid function with different (0.25, 0.5, 1)
steepness values.

In the Fine Tuning section you will see the Steepness option. The figure above illustrates
the effect of varying this value on the steepness of the transition from the function's (here:
FANN_SIGMOID) minimum to its maximum value. The smaller the steepness becomes
the more linear the transfer function behaves. And reversely the larger the steepness is
chosen the more the smooth sigmoid function approaches a step function. For more
details see here, FANNTool allows choosing different stepfunctions from a huge variety
(see FANN documentation
http://leenissen.dk/fann/html/files/fann_datah.html#fann_activationfunc_enum).

211 | P a g e
Stop Function: Stop criterion used during training.

FANN_STOPFUNC_MSE: Stop criterion is Mean Square Error (MSE) value.

FANN_STOPFUNC_BIT: Stop criterion is the number of bits that fail. 'Number of bits'
means the number of output neurons which differ more than the bit fail limit. Epoch
Between Reports: The number of epochs between printing the status to the Log (file) and
Graphic (window) Max Epoch: The maximum number of training epochs

Run

212 | P a g e
Depth interval: The Top Depth and Bottom Depth boxes allow the user to specify the
interval over which user will be run ANN module.

Data set: is the place where the output curve is saved.

213 | P a g e
Part VI: Petrophysics

Chapter 12: Introduction to Petrophysics


This chapter describes the interpretation model to interpret petrophysics for all
reservoir types: fractured basement, fractured clastic and clastic. So main topics of this
chapter:

 Interpretation model for fractured basement


 Interpretation model for fractured clastic
 Interpretation model for clastic

In WI, petrophysics tool is arranged in menu bar >Petrophysics

214 | P a g e
Creating Interpretation Model
WI is unique petrophysics software supporting the workflow to interpret petrophysics.
WI has a particular workflow corresponding with the reservoir rock types.

How to Create Interpretation Model to petrophysical interpretation:

1. Project browser> Wells > Specific Well (example: Well_1) > Interpretation Model
2. Right Click on Interpretation Model >Select New Interpretation Model

215 | P a g e
3. Into Create New Interpretation Model form:
- Name: allows user to define the name of interpretation model by manually
typing text.
- Model: select the reservoir rock type with 3 options: Fracture Basement,
Fracture clastic, clastic.
- Press OK
4. Specific Interpretation Model > Right click > Run workflow >The workflow is
displayed at the right side of window as default. You can move the workflow
anywhere.

Symbol List
Name Symbol Description
PHI  Total porosity
PHI2 2 Secondary porosity
PHI Block bl Block porosity
PHI2FIL 2e Secondary effective porosity
PHIFr f Fracture porosity
PHIFr Cutoff *f Fracture porosity cut off value for fracture
basement
PHIV v Vug porosity
PHI2 Cutoff *2 Secondary porosity cut off for basement

216 | P a g e
reservoir
PHIO o Open porosity
PHIO Cutoff *o Open porosity cut off value
PHI2MAC 2mac Secondary porosity in macro fracture zone
PHI2MIC 2mic Secondary porosity in micro fracture zone
DT Block Tbl DT in unfractured zone
DT MAX Tmax DT in flowing zone
MacFrac MacFrac Proportion of Macro Fracture
MicFrac MicFrac Proportion of Micro Fracture
PERM K Permeability
PERM Cutoff K* Permeability Cut Off Value for fracture
reservoir
SW SW Water Saturation
SWR Swr Residual water saturation
SWR Cutoff S*wr Residual water saturation cut off value
SWRPP Swrpp Residual water saturation of primary pore
SWRSP Swrsp Residual water saturation of secondary pore
RT Block Rtbl Block (unfracture zone) Resistivity
Rmf Rmf Mud filtrate resistivity
Rxo Rxo Flushed zone resistivity
A (LLD/LLS) A Ratio between deep – shallow resistivity logs
A Cutoff (LLD/LLS Cutoff) A* Ratio between deep – shallow resistivity cut off
value for reservoir
VCL Vcl Clay mineral
VCL Cutoff V*cl Clay Mineral Cut off for reservoir
PHI* * Porosity cut off for fractured sandstone
PHI** ** Porosity cut off for unfractured sandsone

217 | P a g e
RHOB RHOB Density log
PEF (PE) PE Photoelectric Factor log
NPHI NPHI Neutron log
DT DT Sonic log
GR GR Gamma ray log
RT Rt Resistivity log
URAN URAN Uran log
THOR THOR Thori log
POTA POTA Potassium log
PAI PAI RHOB*PE
BH temp BH temp Borehole temperature
A Factor A Experience constant for permeability
calculation
B Factor B Experience constant for permeability
calculation

218 | P a g e
Part VII: Fracture Basement
The fracture basement reservoir is characterized by:
- Two porosities and two permeability reservoir
- Macrofracture zones are characterized by macrofracture and macroving systems,
distributing directionally with hydrodynamic permeability
- Microfracture zones distribute along surfaces of macrofractures
- The fracture systems distribute irregular
- The heterrogeneity is high
- The open porosity is low, less than 5-6%, dominant in a range of 2-3%
- The permeability distribute widely, from 0 to thousands milidarcies
- There are many young dykes, tight rocks, with complicated mineralogical
composition
- The resistivity of undestroyed parts is high reaching thousands ohmm

219 | P a g e
220 | P a g e
With the complication of fractured basement reservoir, WI provides the workflow that
using multi-minerals solver method to reduce lithology effect on porosity estimatio

221 | P a g e
Chapter 13: Fracture Basement
The workflow for Fracture Basement in Well-InsightTM includes:

1. Define Interpretation Interval


2. Zone manager
3. Input Curves
4. Input Fluid
5. Input Mineral Model
6. Build Mineral Parameters
7. Multi-Minerals Solver
8. Secondary Porosity
9. Fracture Porosity
10. Filtering Fracture Type
11. Micro and Macro Porosity
12. Water Saturation
13. Permeability
14. QC Synthetic Curves
15. QC Error Evaluation
16. Cutoff and Summation

222 | P a g e
The workflow to petrophysical interpretation for fracture basement reservoir.

How to open Fracture Basement Reservoir Workflow


1. Project Browser > Wells > Specific Well (example Well_1)> Interpretation Model
2. Right-click on Interpretation Model folder > New Interpretation Model
3. Create New Interpretation Model form displays:
- Name: define name of model, example: Basement
- Model: select Fracture Basement

223 | P a g e
4. Right-click on specific interpretation model, example: Basement > Select Run
Workflow

Define Interpretation Interval


Define Interpretation Interval form is designed to set up the interval depth that you are
interested in.

How to open 'Interpretation Settings' form:

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model.


2. Press on 'Define Interpretation Interval' > 'Interpretation Settings' form is opened.

3. Into Interpretation Settings form:


- Top (m), Bottom (m): allows user to define the depth interval that you
wish to interpret. The default values are the start depth and top depth of the
well.
- 'Get Well Depth' button is used to set the default value for top depth and
bottom depth.
- Default save data: select from drop down menu to define the folder to save
output data. In case you want to create new folder, pressing the '+' icon >
Create New Dataset pops up: type name and press OK.

224 | P a g e
- Press 'OK' button to apply and close the form.
Zone Management
Zone management is designed to manage all zones of all wells. The zone
management can handle both manage all existed zone and create new zones.
How to open Zone Management form:
1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model.
2. Press on 'Zone manager' > 'Zone management' form is opened.
3. Into Zone management form:
- Well: displays all available wells of project. The current working well is
displayed as default. You can choose any wells by selecting from drop
down menu
- Parameter: this is default option. This is interpretation model so will
display all interpretation models of selected well.
- User defined: this option gives user a option adding and managing zones
for user define folder in data tree. Easy to switch between parameter and
user defined by tick on/off.

225 | P a g e
Parameters
- Parameter Name: displays all existed interpretation models under Interpretation
Model folder. User can select the wishes parameter by selecting from drop down
menu. If you want to edit name of Parameter, pressing Edit, the Edit Parameter
form pops up to you type the new name.

- Zone Set: displays 3 default zone sets of selected parameter, they are mineral
zone, fluid zone and curve zone. You select your wish zone set from drop down
menu.

226 | P a g e
- Zones table: displays the existed zones of selected zone set. The default zone of
zone set (which has top depth and bottom depth are the start depth and end depth
of well) is not display in zones table. Into zones table:
 Name column: displays the name of zone. you are easy to input the name
of zone by manually typing text.
 Top Depth (m): displays the start depth of zone. You are easy to define
start depth of zone by typing number.
 Bottom Depth (m): displays the bottom depth of zone. You are easy to
define bottom depth of zone by typing number.
 Line Color: is the color of border of zone.
 Text Color: is the color of zone name.
 Background Color: is the color of background of zone.
 Add Zone: allows user to add new zone into zone set. New zone is added
in the last of zone table by default. WI doesn't allow to add overlap zones.
 Delete zone: allows user to delete the selected zone. You can delete
multiple zones by press and keep Ctrl.
User defined: the working of user defined is same as Parameter. But User defined
displays all zone sets under 'User Defined' folder in data tree.

Input Curve
The input curve is designed to you choose the input curves to interpretation. Up to 8
curves can be used.

227 | P a g e
How to open 'Input Curve' form:

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model.

2. Press on 'Input Curves' > 'Input Curve' form is opened.

3. Into Input Curve form:


- Area Of Interest: displays the default zone and all zones that you defined for input
curves. If you want to edit input curve zones, you press 'Zone manager' button to
edit the zones.
- Curve type: displays 8 curve types: PE, URAN, THOR, POTA, RHOB, NPHI, DT,
and GR. If you want to select curve types to join the system of equations, you
highlight on curve type and press forward arrow.
- The 'forward arrow' and 'backward arrow' are used to select and un-select curve
type to input parameter.
- Input Parameters table:
 Curve type column: displayed the selected curves
 Curve Name: allows you to select curve name corresponding with curve type.

228 | P a g e
 Weight: each curve will be assigned a weight value (0 ~ 1). The bigger the
weight value, the more the curve will affect the result.
 Import/Export button: are designed to import/export to external file. (Refer
Import/Export chapter)
- Preview table: view all data that you set up. You could not edit data in preview area.
Input Fluid
The input fluid is designed to you choose the input parameters for fluid to interpretation.
How to open 'Input Curve' form:
1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model.
2. Press on 'Input Fluid' > 'Input Fluid' form is opened.
3. Into Input Fluid form:

229 | P a g e
- Zone list: display the default zone and all zones that you defined for fluid
zone. Each zone may has different fluid parameters.
- Curve and Parameter: is the place to set up the parameters for fluid. WI
recommends the defaults values for the fluid parameters. Click 'Set default'
to get the default values for the fluid parameters.
- Preview: views all data that you set up. You could not edit data in preview
area.

Input Mineral Model


The Mineral Model form is designed to build mineral model for each well sections
(zones). Mineral Model form allows you set up the log respond parameters and minerals.
How to open Mineral Model form:
1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model.
2. Press on 'Input Mineral Model' > 'Mineral Model' form is opened.
3. Into Mineral Model form:

230 | P a g e
- Mineral Zones: displays the default zone and all zones that you define for mineral
zones. Each zones may has different mineral components and parameters.
- Mineral Type: is the mineral library which has all mineral names.
- Forward arrow: using to select mineral from Mineral Type to Parameters.
- Backward arrow: using to move mineral from Parameters table to Mineral Type.
- Default button: which any mineral is selected in Parameters table, WI gives the
default value for granite reservoir rock type. User can edit the value by manually
typing. Click ‘Set Default’ to get the default value for mineral.
- Preview: view all data that you set up. You could not edit data in preview area.

Build Mineral Parameter


Build mineral parameter form provides utility tool to build log respond parameters for
each mineral base on the volume of each minerals and the average curves value.

How to open ‘Build Mineral Parameter’ form:


1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model.
2. Press on 'Build Mineral Parameter' > 'Build Mineral Parameter' form is opened.
3. Into ‘Build Mineral Parameter’ form:
- Mineral: select mineral from drop down list.
- Use: tick on ‘Use’ when you want to select the minerals
- Volume: you have to input the volume of mineral by manually typing.
Total volume of minerals and fluid must be equal 1

231 | P a g e
- Curve Value: Allows user to input the value of selected curves by
manually typing. WI supports 8 curve families. They are
 Density family: RHOB
 Neutron porosity family: NPHI
 Sonic family: DT
 Gamma ray family: GR
 PAI
 URAN
 Thouri family: THORY
 Potassium family: POTA
- Tick on ‘Use’ checkbox to select curve.
- You have to input Min and Max value of each log value for each mineral. If
not WI supports loading the existed file by pressing “Load” button. The
existed file is loaded then you can edit to change the data.
- Press “Run” button > WI calculate the log respond values for each
minerals.
232 | P a g e
- All mineral zones are displayed in zonation table to you select the zone is
exported. You can select one or multiple zones.
- WI supports 4 options to export data to zones. Select option from drop
down list menu:
 Replace: Replace all existed mineral parameters in Input Mineral
Model form and add new minerals from build mineral parameters.
 Add differences: just add the different minerals and keep the existed
mineral in input mineral model form
 Replace the existing: Just replace the existed mineral (similar
minerals) in input mineral model form
 Replace existing and add different: Replace identical minerals
between Build Mineral parameter and Input Mineral Model and add
the different minerals between 2 forms.
4. Press ‘Export to Zone’ to execute the job.

Correction for the mineralogical composition

A presence of different minerals in the rocks depends on their volumetric content that
makes a big influence on physical characteristics. Therefore, in the determination of
porosity, it is very important to evaluate the influence of every main mineral on physical
characteristics.

233 | P a g e
Note:

(1) – By JV “Vietsovpetro”
(2) – By Halliburton (Log Int. Charts, Page 379)
(3) - By Schlumberger

The mineral distribution in the Bach Ho oil field basement rocks

Granite Granodiorite Diorite


Plagioclase 30% – 50% 40% - 55% 47% - 60%
Quartz 25% – 35% 18% - 22% 8% - 15%
K_Feldsp 15% – 30% 17% - 25% 7% - 30%
Biotite 2% - 12% 5% - 15% 5% - 12%

234 | P a g e
235 | P a g e
236 | P a g e
The algorithm for calculating porosity corrected by the mineral composition.
237 | P a g e
The following system linear equations are used to find out the porosity and mineral
volumes. Up to 8 equations can be used. But in the normal case: the number of equation
usually less than 8, and the number of unknown may be not equal the number of
equations. To solve the equations, the least-square error is used.

δb=Φδmf+ΣδmiVmi
ΦN=ΦWmf+ΣWmiVmi
ΔT=ΦΔTmi+ΣΔTmiVmi
U=ΦUmf+ΣUmiVmi
GR=ΣGRmiVmi
TH=ΣTHmiVmi
UR=ΣURmiVmi
PO= ΣPOmiVmi

 Where δb, δmf, δmi and Vmi are respectively the bulk density, mud-filtrate
density, i-mineral density and its volumetric proportion

 ΦN, W, DT, GR, TH, UR, PO and U are respectively the neutron porosity,
hydro, travel time, gamma ray value, thori, uran, potassium content and an
electron absorption section.

238 | P a g e
Multi – Minerals Solver

Multi – Minerals Solver method help to calculate porosity, mineral volumes and
theoretically synthetic curves from a number of ‘input curves’, mineral parameters.

How to open Calculate Minerals & Total Porosity:

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model.


2. Press on 'Multi – Minerals Solver' > 'Calculate Minerals & Total Porosity' form is
opened.

3. Into ‘Calculate Minerals & Total Porosity’ form:

239 | P a g e
- Interval: the interval depth was set up in define interpretation interval is
displayed as default. User can edit the interval by manually typing.
- Reset All Curves Value: ‘tick on’ is default setting. If user checks it, the
WI will update the value of output curve by new settings.
- Skip Points: The default value is 2. User can change by manually typing. If
the skip point is 2 means that WI will calculate for one point and keep this
value for next point.
- Smooth output curves: allows smoothing curve result with specific
smooth level-user can define by manually typing on Smooth level box-
when it is checked.
- Suffix of Synthetic curves: allow user choose the suffix of output curve by
manually typing.
- Save result dataset is a folder where all output curves are saved in. User
can change by manually choosing. The default is dataset of interpretation
interval.
- Running loading bar shows the percentage of calculation process.
- The Run button will activate the calculation process run.
- The Stop button stops the calculation at the current results, and cleans up
the temporary curves. Once runed, the Stop button becomes active.
- The Close button closes form.
- The Save button saves setting form.

240 | P a g e
Block Value
How to open “Block value” form:

4. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model.


5. Press on ‘Block value’> ‘Calculate Block curves’ form is opened.

6. Into ‘Calculate Block curves’ form:


 Zone set allows user to select zone set of interest from drop down menu.
 Top and Bottom boxes enable user to limit the interval of interest by manually
typing. The default is limit of interpretation interval.
 Default button allows user to set up top, bottom as limit of interpretation
interval when user presses on.
 Name column displays name of zone
 Top depth and Bottom depth columns display top depth and bottom depth of
corresponding zone.

241 | P a g e
 Total porosity column allows user to select total porosity curve from drop
down menu. The Default is total porosity curve results from previous step.
 Sonic Curve column allows user to select sonic curve from drop down menu.
The default is sonic input curve.
 PHI Block, DT block and DT MAC columns enable user to define Phi block,
DT block, DT MAC value for each zone by manually typing or by algorithm of
software. The default is value from software:
Block values (Phi block and DT block) are the values at P50 in block zone.
(Block zone has resistivity over than 2000 ohm.m)
DT MAC are the value of DT at P95 in block zone.
User also view total porosity on histogram and display the frequency information to pick
up the block porosity.
∆𝑇𝑏𝑙𝑜𝑐𝑘− ∆𝑇𝑚𝑎𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑥
User also calculates the block porosity by equation: block =
∆𝑇𝑓𝑙𝑢𝑖𝑑− ∆𝑇𝑚𝑎𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑥

242 | P a g e
243 | P a g e
244 | P a g e
245 | P a g e
 Check box beside PHI Block, DT Block, DT MAC allows user to save value
of these parameter to curve
 Dataset allows user to select folder to save all result curves in from drop down
menu. The default is dataset of interpretation interval.
 DT MAC, Phi Block Curve and DT Block boxes enable user to define name
curve of DT MAC, Phi Block Curve, DT Block value by manually typing. The
default is DTMAC, PHIBLK, DTBLK for DT MAC, Phi Block Curve, DT
Block boxes respectively.
 The Close button closes form.
 The Reload button identifies DT MAC, Phi Block Curve, DT Block value for
each zone base on algorithm of software.
 The Manage zones button allows user to edit zone set.
 The Save button saves result on form to output curves.
 The Export button exports result table to .csv file.

246 | P a g e
Secondary Porosity
How to open calculate Secondary Porosity:

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model.


2. Press on 'Secondary Porosity' > 'Calculate Secondary Porosity' form is opened.
3. Into ‘Calculate Secondary Porosity’ form:
- Interval: the interval depth was set up in define interpretation interval is
displayed as default. User can edit the interval by manually typing.
- PHI Dataset: allows user to select the dataset that contains Total porosity
curve. The default dataset is displayed as default.
- PHI: select the total porosity
- PHI Block Dataset: allows user to select the dataset that contains block
porosity. The default dataset is displayed.
- PHI Block: allows users to select the block porosity by selecting from drop
down list.
- Output dataset: allows user to select the dataset that contain the secondary
porosity. The default dataset is displayed.
- PHI2: types the name of secondary porosity. PHI2 is recommended.

Secondary Porosity is calculated by formula:

− block
2 =
1− block

247 | P a g e
Fracture Porosity
How to open Fracture porosity form:

1. Open Workflow Task pane for specific interpretation Fracture Basement


Model.
2. Press on 'Fracture Porosity' > 'Calculate Fracture Porosity' form is opened.
3. Into ‘Calculate Fracture Porosity’ form:
- Interval: the interval depth was set up in define interpretation interval is
displayed as default. User can edit the interval by manually typing.
- DT (mf/ft): allows user to select sonic log. WI automatically detects the sonic
curve, user can also drag and drop curve from data tree to the textbox.
- DT Cutoff: allows user to select the sonic curve in un-fractured zone. WI
automatically detects the DT cutoff curve or user can also drag and drop the
selected curve from data tree.
- PHI2: allows user to select the secondary porosity by drag and drop the
selected curve from data tree to textbox.

248 | P a g e
- PHI Block: allows user to select block porosity. WI detects the block porosity
or you can drag and drop block porosity curve from data tree to textbox.
- RXO: allows user to select the resistivity in the invaded zone. WI detects the
RXO curve or users drag and drop the selected curve form data tree to textbox.
- PHIFr Cutoff: allows user to define the cut off value for fracture porosity. The
default value is 0.0005.
- R Block: allows user to select the resistivity in un –fractured zone Or user can
defines the value of resistivity for un- fractured zone by manually typing
number.
- BH Temp (0C): This textbox allows user to define the temperature of borehole
by degrees Celsius.
- Rmf: allows user to define the resistivity of mud filtrate. The default value is
0.35
- Max Loops: allow user to define the loops of calculation. The default value is
10000.
- Temp (C): The temperature of surface.
- Epsilon: the default value is 0.0005.
- Gradient: temperature gradient. The default value is 3.
- PHI Vug Dataset: allow user to select the folder to save the vug porosity.
- PHI Vug: allows user to define the name of vug porosity by manually typing
in textbox.
- PHI Fracture Dataset: allow user to select the folder to save the fracture
porosity.
- PHI Fracture: allows user to define the name of fracture porosity by manually
typing in textbox.

249 | P a g e
250 | P a g e
Filtering Fracture Type Porosity
The presence of the vug systems in the magmatic rocks without the systems of fractures
(including macro fractures and micro fracture) do not have a possibility to consider rocks
as reservoir.

The filtering module is used to cut off from the reservoir the points have porosity but lack
off systems of fractures.

The filtering based on: Parameter DT is the most sensitive to the presence of fractures

251 | P a g e
Tblock<Tmicro<T*<Tmacro

fracture> 0.0005

How to open Filtering Fracture type:

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model.


2. Press on 'Filtering fracture type' > 'Filtering fracture type’ form is opened.
3. Into ‘Filtering Fracture Type’ form:
- Interval: the interval depth was set up in define interpretation interval is
displayed as default. You can edit the interval by manually typing.
- PHIFRAC: allow you to select the fracture porosity. WI automatically detects
the fracture porosity by name ‘PHIFRAC’.
- PHI2: allow you to select the secondary porosity. WI automatically detects
secondary porosity by name “PHI2”.
- PHIFRAC Cutoff: allow you to define the cut off value for PHIFRAC. The
default value is 0.0005. WI will remove PHIFRAC and PHI2 at the position
that has PHIFRAC < 0.0005.
- Dataset: allow you select the folder to save output curves.
- PHI2FIL: that is the PHI2 curve after filtering.
- PHIFRACFIL: that is PHIFRAC curve after filtering.

252 | P a g e
Micro and Macro Porosity
The Micro and Macro Porosity form helps you define the porosity in macro fracture
zones and micro fracture zones.

How to open Calculate Micro and Macro Porosity:

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model.


2. Press on 'Micro and Macro Porosity' > 'Calculate Micro and Macro Porosity’ form
is opened.
3. Into ‘Calculate Micro and Macro Porosity’ form:
- Interval: the interval depth was set up in define interpretation interval is
displayed as default. You can edit the interval by manually typing.
- DT: allows you to select sonic curve. WI automatically detects the sonic curve
or you can drag and drop sonic curve from data tree to textbox.
- DT Block: allows you to select DT curve in tight rock area.
253 | P a g e
- RT: allows you to select the deep resistivity curve.
- RT Block: deep resistivity in tight rock. You also can select curve or define
value.
- PHI2FIL: allows you to select secondary porosity curve after filtering.
- DTMAX: DT in macro zone.
- You select the folder to save output data at Dataset and define the output
names at PHI2MIC and PHI2MAC. They are secondary porosity after filtering
at macro zones and micro zones.

Water Saturation
Water saturation form is designed to calculate the Residual Water Saturation in reservoir.

Residual water saturation equation:

log 𝑆𝑤𝑟 = −1.845𝑥 2 + 0.141𝑥 + 1.886

With x: proportion of Macro fracture porosity.

254 | P a g e
How to open “Water Saturation” form:

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model.


2. Press on 'Water Saturation' > 'Calculate Water Saturation’ form is opened.
3. Into ‘Water Saturation’ form:
- Interval: the interval depth was set up in define interpretation interval is displayed
as default. User can edit the interval by manually typing.
- Thickness: defines the thickness to calculate the water saturation. The min value
is 1 and Max value is the total section of well.
- Macro Porosity: allows user to select secondary porosity in macro zone.
- Micro porosity: allows user to select secondary porosity in micro zone.
- A, B, C coefficient: are the coefficient of formula to define SW.
- Swr Cutoff (%): allows user to define the Swr cut off value. The default value is
78%.
- Select the folder to save output file at Dataset and the name of output curve at
Water Saturation textbox.

255 | P a g e
Calculate Permeability
WI supports to define the Permeability of reservoir by 2 formulas:

1. Permeability by VSP formula:

 b (1 S wr )
T
K a Log
S wr  0.1 TBL
With:

K: Permeability

a, b: Coefficients

: Secondary porosity in macro fracture zone

Swr: Residual water saturation

T: Sonic curve

TBL: Sonic curve in unfractured zone

2. Calculate Permeability by Nelson formula

256 | P a g e
2 3
K=8.35e+6*S *f
With:

K: permeability

S: fracture spacing

f: fracture porosity

How to open “Calculate Permeability” form:

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model.


2. Press on 'Permeability' > 'Calculate Permeability’ form is opened.
3. Into ‘Calculate Permeability’ form:
- Interval: the interval depth was set up in define interpretation interval is displayed
as default. User can edit the interval by manually typing.
- DT (ms/ft): allows user to select sonic curve. WI automatically detects the sonic
curve by name DT or you can drag and drop sonic curve form data tree to text box.
- DT Block: allows user to select sonic curve in unfractured zone.
- PHI2MAC: allows user to select secondary porosity in macro fracture zone.
- A Factor, B Factor: allows user to define a, b coefficients in VSP formula. Those
coefficients depend on the reservoir.
- Swr: allows user to select residual water saturation curve. WI automatically
detects the Swr curve or user can drag and drop Swr curve from data tree to text
box.
- Use Fracture Spacing: tick on if user wants to use the Nelson formula to define
Permeability.
- Dataset: users have to define the folder to save output curve.
- PERM: allows users define the name of permeability by manually typing
- PERM_FS: allows user define the name of permeability using Nelson formula.

257 | P a g e
Calculate Synthetic Curves Quality

This form is designed to help you manage to the quality of result of multi-minerals solve
method by finding the correlation between synthetic curves and logging curves.

How to open “Calculate Synthetic Curves Quality” form:

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model.


2. Press on 'QC Synthetic curves' > 'Calculate Synthetic Curves Quality’ form is
opened.
3. Into ‘Calculate Synthetic Curves Quality’ form:
- Top (m), Bottom (m): allows user to define the interval to compare
between synthetic curves and logging curves by manually typing. You can
press “default” button to set the interval from top well to bottom well.
- Data set: user has to select the folder that contains the synthetic curves.
258 | P a g e
- Press Run to active the operation.
- 'Divergence': the difference between the synthetic curve and logging
curve. The smaller this value is the better.
- 'Correlation': the similarity between the synthetic curve and logging
curve. The bigger this value is the better.
- Export: press export to save the data to txt file.

Calculate Error Evaluation


1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model.
2. Press on 'QC Error Evaluation' > 'Calculate Synthetic Curves Quality’ form is
opened.
3. Into ‘Calculate Error Evaluation’ form:

259 | P a g e
- Top (m), Bottom (m): allow user to define the interval to compare between
synthetic curves and logging curves by manually typing. User can press
“default” button to set the interval from top well to bottom well.
- Data set: users have to select the folder that contains the synthetic curves.
- Press Run to active the operation.
- Mean: the mean value of error between synthetic curves and logging curves.
- Std.Variance: the standard variance of error curves.
- Export: press export to save the data to txt file.

Cutoff and Summation


Cutoff and summation form is designed to display and export all calculation result
curves.

How to open “Cutoff and Summation” form:

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model.


2. Press on 'Cutoff and Summation' > 'Cutoff and summation’ form is opened.

260 | P a g e
3. Into ‘Cutoff and summation’ form:
 Input Curves area:
- Micro Porosity: allows you to select secondary porosity in micro
fracture zones. WI detects this curve by name “PHI2MIC”. You can also
drag and drop selected curve from data tree to text box.
- Macro Porosity: allows you to select secondary porosity in macro
fracture zones. WI detects this curve by name “PHI2MAC”. You can
also drag and drop selected curve from data tree to text box.
- Permeability: allows you to select permeability curve. WI detects curve
with the name PERM. You can drag and drop the selected curve from
data tree to text box.
- 2nd Porosity: allows you to select the secondary porosity curve.
- Frac. Porosity: allows you to select the fracture porosity curve.
- PERM Cutoff: allows you to define the cut off value for permeability.
The default value is 0.
- 2nd Porosity Cutoff: allows user to set up the cut off value for
secondary porosity. The default value is 0.003.
- Frac. Por Cutoff: allows user to define the cut off value for fracture
porosity. The default value is 0.0005.
 Depth area:
- Ref. Depth: you can select the reference depth is MD or TVD or TVDSS
from drop down menu.
- Top, Bottom: allow you select the top depth and bottom depth in export
file. Press Default depth to get the interval from start depth to end depth
of well.
- Thickness: define the calculating thickness.
- 1st at Depth: define the depth of first line in export table.
- Use zone: tick on if you want to export data by zone. And select the zone
set beside.

261 | P a g e
 Included in the report
- Tick on Calculated curves quality: tick on to attach the calculated
curve quality
- Mineral list: tick on to attach the mineral list in the report file.
- Create Flow Index: help you create the fracture intensity.
- Dataset: allow you to select the folder to contains the Flow Index curve
Press “Run” to operate job.
Into output table:
You can move Zoom in/out the table. Especially you can save the file to the format: PDF
file, HTML file, MHT file, RTF file, XLS file, XLSX file, CSV file, Text file and
Image file.

262 | P a g e
263 | P a g e
Part VIII: Fracture Clastic (Tight Sandstone)
The Tight Sandstone reservoir is characterized by:

- Sandstone with porosity lower than cut off will have no storage and permeability
capacity if no fracture present.
- The matrix-fracture transfer will allow tight zone (intergranular porosity lower
than cut off) to become pay.
- Conventional Sw calculation is not applicable for fractured tight matrix zone.

F, K

WI log process for tight sandstone

264 | P a g e
265 | P a g e
The workflow for Fracture Clastic reservoir in Well-InsightTM
includes:

1. Define Interpretation Interval


2. Zone manager
3. Input Curves
4. Input Fluid
5. Input Mineral Model
6. Build Mineral Parameters
7. Multi-Minerals Solver
8. Secondary Porosity
9. Open Porosity
10. Water Saturation
11. Permeability
12. Filtering
13. QC Synthetic Curves
14. QC Error Evaluation
15. Cutoff and Summation

266 | P a g e
Chapter 14: Fracture Clastic

How to open Fracture Clastic Reservoir Workflow


1. Project Browser > Wells > Specific Well (example Well_1) > Interpretation
Model.
2. Right-click on Interpretation Model folder > New Interpretation Model.
3. Create New Interpretation Model form displays:
- Name: defines name of model, example: Sandstone
- Model: selects Fracture Clastic
4. Right-click on specific interpretation model, example: Sandstone> Select Run
Workflow.

267 | P a g e
Define Interpretation Interval
Define Interpretation Interval form is designed to set up the interval depth that you are
interested in.

How to open 'Interpretation Settings' form:

4. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model.

268 | P a g e
5. Press on 'Define Interpretation Interval' > 'Interpretation Settings' form is opened.

6. Into Interpretation Settings form:


- Top (m), Bottom (m): allows user to define the depth interval that you
wish to interpret. The default values are the start depth and top depth of the
well.
- 'Get Well Depth' button is used to set the default value for top depth and
bottom depth.
- Default save data: select from drop down menu to define the folder to save
output data. In case you want to create new folder, pressing the '+' icon >
Create New Dataset pops up: type name and press OK.
- Press 'OK' button to apply and close the form.
Zone Management
Zone management is designed to manage all zones of all wells. The zone management
can handle both manage all existed zone and create new zones.
How to open Zone Management form:
4. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model.
5. Press on 'Zone manager' > 'Zone management' form is opened.
6. Into Zone management form:

269 | P a g e
- Well: displays all available wells of project. The current working well is
displayed as default. You can choose any wells by selecting from drop
down menu
- Parameter: this is default option. This is interpretation model so will
display all interpretation models of selected well.
- User defined: this option gives user a option adding and managing zones
for user define folder in data tree. Easy to switch between parameter and
user defined by tick on/off.

Parameters
- Parameter Name: displays all existed interpretation models under Interpretation
Model folder. User can select the wishes parameter by selecting from drop down
menu. If you want to edit name of Parameter, pressing Edit, the Edit Parameter
form pops up to you type the new name.

270 | P a g e
- Zone Set: displays 3 default zone sets of selected parameter, they are mineral
zone, fluid zone and curve zone. You select your wish zone set from drop down
menu.
- Zones table: displays the existed zones of selected zone set. The default zone of
zone set (which has top depth and bottom depth are the start depth and end depth
of well) is not display in zones table. Into zones table:
 Name column: displays the name of zone. you are easy to input the name
of zone by manually typing text.
 Top Depth (m): displays the start depth of zone. You are easy to define
start depth of zone by typing number.
 Bottom Depth (m): displays the bottom depth of zone. You are easy to
define bottom depth of zone by typing number.
 Line Color: is the color of border of zone.
 Text Color: is the color of zone name.
 Background Color: is the color of background of zone.
 Add Zone: allows user to add new zone into zone set. New zone is added
in the last of zone table by default. WI doesn't allow to add overlap zones.
 Delete zone: allows user to delete the selected zone. You can delete
multiple zones by press and keep Ctrl.
User defined: the working of user defined is same as Parameter. But User defined
displays all zone sets under 'User Defined' folder in data tree.

Input Curve

271 | P a g e
The input curve is designed to you choose the input curves to interpretation. Up to 8
curves can be used.
How to open 'Input Curve' form:
1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model.
2. Press on 'Input Curves' > 'Input Curve' form is opened.
3. Into Input Curve form:
- Area Of Interest: displays

- Area Of Interest: displays the default zone and all zones that you defined
for input curves. If you want to edit input curve zones, you press 'Zone
manager' button to edit the zones.
- Curve type: displays 8 curve types: PE, URAN, THOR, POTA, RHOB,
NPHI, DT, GR. If you want to select curve types to join the system of
equations, you highlight on curve type and press forward arrow.
- The 'forward arrow' and 'backward arrow' are used to select and un-
select curve type to input parameter.
- Input Parameters table:

272 | P a g e
 Curve type column: displayed the selected curves
 Curve Name: allows you to select curve name corresponding with
curve type.
 Weight: each curve will be assigned a weight value (0 ~ 1). The
bigger the weight value, the more the curve will affect the result.
 Import/Export button: are designed to import/export to external file.
(Refer Import/Export chapter)
- Preview table: view all data that you set up. You could not edit data in
preview area.

Input Fluid
The input fluid is designed to you choose the input parameters for fluid to interpretation.
How to open 'Input Curve' form:
1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model.
2. Press on 'Input Fluid' > 'Input Fluid' form is opened.
3. Into Input Fluid form:

273 | P a g e
- Zone list: display the default zone and all zones that you defined for fluid
zone. Each zone may has different fluid parameters.
- Curve and Parameter: is the place to set up the parameters for fluid. WI
recommends the defaults values for the fluid parameters. Click 'Set default'
to get the default values for the fluid parameters.
- Preview: view all data that you set up. You could not edit data in preview
area.
Input Mineral Model
The Mineral Model form is designed to build mineral model for each well sections
(zones). Mineral Model form allows you set up the log respond parameters and minerals.
How to open Mineral Model form:

274 | P a g e
1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model.
2. Press on 'Input Mineral Model' > 'Mineral Model' form is opened.
3. Into Mineral Model form:

- Mineral Zones: displays the default zone and all zones that you define for mineral
zones. Each zones may has different mineral components and parameters.
- Mineral Type: is the mineral library which has all mineral names.
- Forward arrow: using to select mineral from Mineral Type to Parameters
- Backward arrow: using to move mineral from Parameters table to Mineral Type.
- Default button: which any mineral is selected in Parameters table, WI gives the
default value for granite reservoir rock type. User can edit the value by manually
typing. Click ‘Set Default’ to get the default value for mineral.
- Preview: view all data that you set up. You could not edit data in preview area.

Build Mineral Parameter


Build mineral parameter form provides utility tool to build log respond parameters for
each mineral base on the volume of each minerals and the average curves value.

275 | P a g e
How to open ‘Build Mineral Parameter’ form:
5. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model.
6. Press on 'Build Mineral Parameter' > 'Build Mineral Parameter' form is opened.
7. Into ‘Build Mineral Parameter’ form:
- Mineral: select mineral from drop down list.
- Use: tick on ‘Use’ when you want to select the minerals
- Volume: you have to input the volume of mineral by manually typing.
Total volume of minerals and fluid must be equal 1

- Curve Value: Allows user to input the value of selected curves by


manually typing. WI supports 8 curve families. They are
 Density family: RHOB
 Neutron porosity family: NPHI
 Sonic family: DT
 Gamma ray family: GR
 PAI

276 | P a g e
 URAN
 Thouri family: THORY
 Potassium family: POTA
- Tick on ‘Use’ checkbox to select curve.
- You have to input Min and Max value of each log value for each mineral. If
not WI supports loading the existed file by pressing “Load” button. The
existed file is loaded then you can edit to change the data.
- Press “Run” button > WI calculate the log respond values for each
minerals.
- All mineral zones are displayed in zonation table to you select the zone is
exported. You can select one or multiple zones.
- WI supports 4 options to export data to zones. Select option from drop
down list menu:
 Replace: Replace all existed mineral parameters in Input Mineral
Model form and add new minerals from build mineral parameters.
 Add differences: just add the different minerals and keep the existed
mineral in input mineral model form
 Replace the existing: Just replace the existed mineral (similar
minerals) in input mineral model form
 Replace existing and add different: Replace identical minerals
between Build Mineral parameter and Input Mineral Model and add
the different minerals between 2 forms.
8. Press ‘Export to Zone’ to execute the job.

Multi – Minerals Solver


Multi – Minerals Solver method helps to calculate volumetric proportion of each
mineral of rock (with assumption: total porosity is fluid volume) and built theoretical
synthetic curves, deriving from this result.

277 | P a g e
How to open Calculate Minerals & Total Porosity:

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model.


2. Press on Multi – Minerals Solver > Calculate Minerals & Total Porosity form is
opened.

3. Into ‘Calculate Minerals & Total Porosity’ form:


- Interval: the interval depth was set up in define interpretation interval is
displayed as default. User can edit the interval by manually typing.
- Skip Points: The default value is 2. User can change by manually typing. If
the skip point is 2 means that WI will calculate for one point and keep this
value for next point.

278 | P a g e
- Reset All Curves Value: ‘tick on’ is default setting. If user checks it, the
WI will update the value of output curve by new settings.
- Suffix of Synthetic curves: allow user choose the suffix of output curve by
manually typing.
- Save Data in: allows user choose the folder to save all the output curves.
1. Press ‘Run’ to execute the job.

Mineral Distribution of Sands and Shales


A presence of different minerals in the rocks depending on their volumetric content
makes a big influence on physical characteristics. Therefore, in the determination of
porosity, it is very important to evaluate the influence of every main mineral on physical
characteristics.

60
Sand layer
Series1
Series2
55
Series3

50 Series4
Series5
45 Series6
Series7
40 Series8
Series9
35
Series10
Series11
30
Series12

25 Series13
Series14
20 Series15
Series16
15 Series17
Series18
10
Series19
Series20
5
Series21

0 Series22
Series23
Plagioclase Quartz K- Feldspar Chlorite Zeolite

279 | P a g e
Shale layer Series3
60
Series4
55 Series5
50 Series6
Series7
45
Series8
40
Series9
35 Series10
30 Series12

25 Series13
Series14
20
Series15
15
Series16
10 Series17

5 Series18
Series19
0
Series20
Plagioclase Quartz K- Feldspar Chlorite Zeolite
Series21

Sands Shale
Plagioclase From 5% to 25%; From 5% to 28%; Average:
Average: 15% 14%
Quartz From 25% to 49%; From 7% to 20%; Average:
Average: 33% 22%
K_Feldsp From 15% to 30%; From 5% to 28%; Average:
Average: 15% 15%
Zeolite From 11% to 18%; From 20% to 55%; average:
average: 21% 30%
Chlorite From 2 to 18%, average From 5 to 30%, average
7% 12%

280 | P a g e
The following system linear equations are used to find out the porosity and mineral
volumes. Up to 8 equations can be used. But in the normal case: the number of equation
usually less than 8, and the number of unknown may be not equal the number of
equations. To solve the equations, the least-square error is used.

δb=Φδmf+ΣδmiVmi
ΦN=ΦWmf+ΣWmiVmi
ΔT=ΦΔTmi+ΣΔTmiVmi
U=ΦUmf+ΣUmiVmi
GR=ΣGRmiVmi
TH=ΣTHmiVmi
UR=ΣURmiVmi
PO= ΣPOmiVmi

 Where δb, δmf, δmi and Vmi are respectively the bulk density, mud-filtrate
density, i-mineral density and its volumetric proportion.

 ΦN, W, DT, GR, TH, UR, PO and U are respectively the neutron porosity,
hydro, travel time, gamma ray value, thori, uran, potassium content and an
electron absorption section.

281 | P a g e
Block Porosity
WI gives the method to define the block porosity by using the frequency information of
total porosity. You can define the rock type at each interval so that you can set up the
block porosity.

Example, define the block porosity of Well_A, from 3430 to 3475:

1. Create the cross plot between Sonic curve and total porosity curve.
2. Cross plot menu > Frequency Info > Y curve is PHI_TOTAL > Observe the blue
row > See that the most of points is about 0.05 – 0.055 > So you can choose the
PHI block between 0.05 – 0.055.
You also view total porosity on histogram and display the frequency information to pick
up the block porosity.
∆𝑇𝑏𝑙𝑜𝑐𝑘− ∆𝑇𝑚𝑎𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑥
You also calculate the block porosity by equation: block =
∆𝑇𝑓𝑙𝑢𝑖𝑑− ∆𝑇𝑚𝑎𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑥

282 | P a g e
Fracture - Vug Porosity
How to open calculate fracture – vug porosity:

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model.


2. Press on 'fracture – vug porosity'> 'Calculate fracture – vug porosity' form is
opened.
3. Into ‘Fracture – Vug Porosity’ form:
- Interval: the interval depth was set up in “define interpretation interval” form
is displayed as default. You can edit the interval by manually typing.
- PHI Dataset: allows user to select the dataset that contains Total porosity
curve. The default dataset is displayed as default.
- PHI: select the total porosity
- PHI Block Dataset: allows user to select the dataset that contains block
porosity. The default dataset is displayed.
- PHI Block: allow users to select the block porosity by selecting from drop
down list.
- Output dataset: allows you to select the dataset that contain the fracture vug
porosity. The default dataset is displayed.
- PHIFV: typing the name of secondary porosity. PHIFV is recommended.

Fracture - Vug porosity is calculated by formula:

− block
fv =
1− block

283 | P a g e
Open Porosity
How to open calculate secondary:

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model.


2. Press on 'Open Porosity' > 'Open Porosity' form is opened.
3. Into ‘Open Porosity’ form:
- Interval: the interval depth was set up in define interpretation interval is
displayed as default. You can edit the interval by manually typing.
- Porosity: allows you select the total porosity curve.
- Facture-Vug Porosity: allows you to select the fracture – vug porosity. WI
automatically detects fracture – vug porosity by the curve name PHIFV or
you can drag and drop the curve from data tree to text box.
- DT: allows you to select the sonic curve. WI detects the sonic curve by
name DT. You also can drag and drop selected sonic curve from data tree to
text box.
- DT Block: allows you to select the sonic curve in unfracture zones.

284 | P a g e
- V-Clay: allows you to select the clay volume curve. WI detects the curve
with name VCL or you can drag and drop selected clay volume curve from
data tree to text box.
- PHI Block: allows you to select the block porosity.
- V-Clay Cut off: allows you to define the cut off value for clay volume
curve.
- PHI*: allows you to define cut off value of porosity curve for fractured
sandstone.
- PHI**: allows you to define cut off value of porosity curve for unfractured
sandstone.
- Dataset: allows you to select the folder to save the open porosity curve.
- Open Porosity: allows you to define the name of open porosity curve. The
PHIO text is displayed as default.
4. Press “Run” button to operate the job.

Calculate Water Saturation


Calculate water saturation form is designed to define the residual water saturation of
tight sandstone reservoir.

How to open “Calculate Water Saturation” form:

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model.


2. Press on 'Water Saturation'> 'Calculate Water Saturation' form is opened.
3. Into ‘Calculate Water Saturation’ form:
- Depth Interval: the interval depth was set up in “define interpretation
interval” form is displayed as default. You can edit the interval by manually
typing. Press “Default” button to get the start depth and bottom depth of
well.
- PHIFV: allow you to select fracture – vug porosity by drag and drop the
selected curve to text box.

285 | P a g e
- PHIO: allow you to select open porosity by drag and drop the selected
curve to text box.
- Swirsp: allow you to define the residual water saturation of secondary pore
value by manually typing.
- Swirpp: allow you to define the residual water saturation of primary pore
value by manually typing.
- Dataset: allow you to select the folder to save the residual water saturation
curve.
- Water Saturation: allow you to type the name of water saturation curve.
WI suggests the SWR name.
Press “Run” to operate the job.

Filtering
Filtering form is designed to filter the curve value for reservoir by cut off values.

286 | P a g e
How to open “Filtering” form:

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model.


2. Press on 'Filtering' > 'Filtering' form is opened.
3. Into ‘Filtering’ form:
- Depth Interval: the interval depth was set up in “define interpretation
interval” form is displayed as default. You can edit the interval by manually
typing. Press “Default” button to get the start depth and bottom depth of
well.
- PHIFV: allows you to select Fracture – Vug Porosity. WI helps to detect
the Fracture – Vug curve with the name PHIFV. If not you can drag and
drop the selected curve to text box.
- PHIO: allows you to select the open porosity curve. WI helps to detect the
open porosity curve with the name PHIO. If not you can drag and drop the
selected curve to text box.

287 | P a g e
- SWR: allows you to select the residual water saturation curve. WI helps to
detect the residual water saturation curve with the name SWR. If not you
can drag and drop the selected curve to text box.
- PERM: allows you to select the permeability curve. WI helps to detect the
permeability curve with the name PERM. If not you can drag and drop the
selected curve to text box.
- PHIFVFIL: allows you to define the name of Fracture – Vug Porosity
curve after filtering by manually typing.
- PHIOFIL: allows you to define the name of open porosity curve after
filtering by manually typing.
- SWRFIL: allows you to type the name of residual water saturation curve
after filtering.
- PERMFIL: allows you to type the name of the permeability curve after
filtering.
- DT: allows you to select the sonic curve by drag and drop from data tree to
text box.
- DTBLK: allows you to select sonic curve in un-fractured zones.
- A* (LLD/LLS): allow you to define the cut off value for LLD/LLS.
- VCL*: allow you to define the cut off value for clay volume. The default
value is 0.35.
- LLD: allows you to select the deep resistivity curve by drag and drop
selected curve from data tree to text box.
- LLS: allows you to select the shallow resistivity curve by drag and drop
selected curve from data tree to text box.
Press “Run” to operate the job.

Calculate Synthetic Curves Quality

288 | P a g e
This form is designed to help you manage to the quality of result of multi-minerals solve
method by finding the correlation between synthetic curves and logging curves.

How to open “Calculate Synthetic Curves Quality” form:

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model.


2. Press on 'QC Synthetic curves' > 'Calculate Synthetic Curves Quality’ form is
opened.
3. Into ‘Calculate Synthetic Curves Quality’ form:
- Top (m), Bottom (m): allow you to define the interval to compare between
synthetic curves and logging curves by manually typing. You can press
“default” button to set the interval from top well to bottom well.
- Data set: you have to select the folder that contains the synthetic curves.
- Press Run to active the operation.
- 'Divergence': the difference between the synthetic curve and logging
curve. The smaller this value the better.
- 'Correlation': the similarity between the synthetic curve and logging
curve. The bigger this value the better.
- Export: press export to save the data to txt file.

289 | P a g e
Calculate Error Evaluation
1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model.
2. Press on 'QC Error Evaluation' > 'Calculate Synthetic Curves Quality’ form is
opened.
3. Into ‘Calculate Error Evaluation’ form:
- Top (m), Bottom (m): allow you to define the interval to compare between
synthetic curves and logging curves by manually typing. You can press
“default” button to set the interval from top well to bottom well.
- Data set: you have to select the folder that contains the synthetic curves.
- Press Run to active the operation.
- Mean: the mean value of error between synthetic curves and logging curves.
- Std.Variance: the standard variance of error curves.
- Export: press export to save the data to txt file.

290 | P a g e
Cutoff and Summation

Cutoff and summation form is designed to display and export all calculation result
curves.

How to open “Cutoff and Summation” form:

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model.


2. Press on 'Cutoff and Summation' > 'Cutoff and summation’ form is opened.
3. Into ‘Cutoff and summation’ form:
 Input Curves area:
- PHI: allows you to select total porosity. WI detects this curve by name
“PHI”. You can also drag and drop selected curve from data tree to text
box.
- PHIOFIL: allows you to select open porosity. WI detects this curve by
name “PHIOFIL”. You can also drag and drop selected curve from data
tree to text box.

291 | P a g e
- PHIFVFIL: allows you to select Fracture – Vug Porosity curve. WI
detects curve with the name PHIFVFIL. You can drag and drop the
selected curve from data tree to text box.
- PERM: allows you to select the permeability curve.WI detects curve
with the name PERM. You can drag and drop the selected curve from
data tree to text box.
- LLD: allows you to select the deep resistivity curve.WI detects curve
with the name “LLD”. You can drag and drop the selected curve from
data tree to text box.
- LLS: allows you to select the shallow resistivity curve.WI detects curve
with the name “LLS”. You can drag and drop the selected curve from
data tree to text box.
- A*: allows you to define the cut off value for LLD/LLS. The default
value is 1.5.
- VCL*: allows you to define the cut off value for clay volume curve. The
default value is 0.35. You can change by manually typing.
- PHIO*: allows the cut off value for open porosity curve. The default
value is 0.003.
- SWR*: allows you to define the cut off value for residual water
saturation curve. The default value is 0.7
 Depth area:
- Ref. Depth: you can select the reference depth is MD or TVD or TVDSS
from drop down menu.
- Zones: allows you to select the zone set by click on drop down list.
 Included in the report
- Tick on Calculated curves quality: tick on to attach the calculated curve
quality
- Mineral list: tick on to attach the mineral list in the report file.
Press “Run” to operate job.

292 | P a g e
Into output table: you can move. Zoom in/out the table. Especially you can save the file
to the format: PDF file, HTML file, MHT file, RTF file, XLS file, XLSX file, CSV
file, Text file and Image file.

293 | P a g e
Part IX: Clastic
Particular characteristics of Clastic reservoir:

- Particular characteristics of Clastic reservoirs are that they had been formed in a
sandstone layer or collection of some sandstone – siltstone layers with a thickness
from a few meters to a few tens of meters.
- For oil & gas reservoir in sedimentary Clastic rocks often exists oil water contact.
However, for oil and gas reservoir formed in Sandstone lenses, OWC could not
exist.

Oil reservoirs in sedimentary Clastic rocks often have a rather high level of heterogeneity
of lithological composition, porosity and permeability

294 | P a g e
Chapter 15: Clastic
The workflow for Clastic Reservoir in Well-InsightTM includes:

1. Input Parameter
2. Quick Look
3. Clay Volume
4. Porosity
5. Utilities
6. Water Saturation
7. Cutoff And Summation

295 | P a g e
Input Parameters

Define Interpretation Interval


Define Area of Interest form is designed to set up the interval depth that you are
interested in.

How to open 'Interpretation Settings' form:

7. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model.


8. Press on 'Define Area of Interest' > 'Interpretation Settings' form is opened.
9. Into Interpretation Settings form:
- Top (m), Bottom (m): allows user to define the depth interval that you wish to
interpret. The default values are the start depth and top depth of the well.
- 'Get Well Depth' button is used to set the default value of starting and ending
well depth for top depth and bottom depth.
- Default save data: select from drop down menu to define the folder to save
output data. In case you want to create new folder, pressing the '+' icon > Create
New Dataset pops up: type name and press OK.
Press 'OK' button to apply and close the form.

296 | P a g e
Zone Management
Zone management is designed to manage all zones of all wells. The zone management
can handle both manage all existed zone and create new zones.
How to open Zone Management form:
7. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model.
8. Press on 'Zone manager' > 'Zone management' form is opened.
9. Into Zone management form:
- Well: displays all available wells of project. The current working well is
displayed as default. You can choose any wells by selecting from drop
down menu
- Parameter: this is default option. This is interpretation model so will
display all interpretation models of selected well.
- User defined: this option gives user an option adding and managing zones
for user define folder in data tree. Easy to switch between parameter and
user defined by tick on/off.
Parameters
- Parameter Name: displays all existed interpretation models under Interpretation
Model folder. User can select the wishes parameter by selecting from drop down
menu. If you want to edit name of Parameter, pressing Edit, the Edit Parameter
form pops up to you type the new name.
- Zone Set: displays 4 default zone sets of selected parameter, they are Basic zone,
Clay volume and Porosity, Water saturation zone and Cutoff and Summation zone.
You select your wish zone set from drop down menu.
- Zones table: displays the existed zones of selected zone set. The default zone of
zone set (which has top depth and bottom depth are the start depth and end depth
of well) is not display in zones table. Into zones table:

297 | P a g e
 Name column: displays the name of zone. You are easy to input the name
of zone by manually typing text.
 Top Depth (m): displays the start depth of zone. You are easy to define
start depth of zone by typing number.
 Bottom Depth (m): displays the bottom depth of zone. You are easy to
define bottom depth of zone by typing number.
 Line Color: is the color of border of zone.
 Text Color: is the color of zone name.
 Background Color: is the color of background of zone.

Browse button: Allows user to find the zone parameters to load to Zone management

Paste: Allows user to copy and paste zone parameters to from *.csv and *.txt file to Zone
management.

Export: Allows user to export the parameters in zone table to *.csv or *.txt file.

Add Row above and Add Row bottom: Allows user to add new zone into zone set.
New zone is added in the last of zone table by default. Well insight doesn't allow adding
overlap zones.

Add Row above: the software provides to add 5 meters interval depth above the Zone
table which is existed in input data.

Add Row bellow: the software provides to add 5 meters interval depth below the Zone
table which is existed in input data.

Delete Rows: Allows user to delete the selected zone. You can delete multiple zones by
press and keep Ctrl.

Clear All: allows user to delete all exists zone.

298 | P a g e
User defined: the working of user defined is same as Parameter. But User defined
displays all zone sets under 'User Defined' folder in data tree.

Apply button: Allows user to save the parameters in Zone table

OK button: Allows user to load the zoneset and close the Zone management form.

299 | P a g e
Quick Look

Basic Analysis
Introduction

The Basic Analysis module is used to make a quick and basic log analysis.

Clay volume is calculated from Gamma Ray.


Porosity is calculated either from Density or Sonic tool.
Water Saturations are calculated using Archie equation. No hydrocarbon or bad-hole
corrections are made. No flushed zone Sxo calculations are made.

Input

Name Symbol Unit Description


Density RHOB g/cm3 Density log reading in zone of interest
Sonic DT Us/ft Compressional slowness log reading in zone of interest
Gamma ray GR API Gamma ray log reading in zone of interest
Resistivity RT Ohm.m Resistivity log reading in zone of interest

Parameters

 Gamma ray

Name Symbol Unit Description Default value


Gamma ray clean GRclean gAPI Gamma ray log reading 100% sand 10

Gamma ray clay GRclay gAPI Gamma ray log reading 100% clay 120

Method Method choice see Equations for more details Linear

300 | P a g e
 Density

Name Symbol Unit Description Default value


Bulk Density clean 𝜌clean g/cm3 Density log reading in 100% sand 2.65

Bulk Density Fluid 𝜌f g/cm3 Density log reading in 100% water 1

Bulk Density clay 𝜌clay d/cm3 Density log reading in 100% clay 2.4

 Sonic

Name Symbol Unit Description Default value


Compressional 𝛥tclean Us/ft Compressional slowness log 55
slowness clean reading in 100% sand
Compressional 𝛥tfluid Us/ft Compressional slowness log 189
slowness fluid reading in 100% water
Compressional 𝛥clay Us/ft Compressional slowness log 100
slowness clay reading in 100% clay
Sonic Method unitless Used for the equation type of the Wyliie
computation method
Compaction correction Cp unitless Compaction correction used in the 1
PHIT computation

 Archie_Water saturation

Name Symbol Unit Description Default value

Turtuosity a unitless Turtuosity factor 1


factor
Cementation m unitless Cementation exponent 2
exponent Available if the cementation exponent input
variable is missing
Saturation n unitless Saturation exponent 2

301 | P a g e
exponent Available if the cementation exponent input
variable is missing
Formation Rw Ohm.m Formation water resistivity 0.12
water
resistivity

Output

Name Symbol Unit Description


Porosity PHI v/v the porosity calculated from the Density or Sonic log.
Water saturation unlimited Swu v/v Sw calculation from Archie's equation. No 'limits' have
been applied. This means that the SWu curve could have
values greater than 1.0 (100 %).
Water saturation Sw v/v Sw calculation from Archie's equation
Bulk volume Water BVW the amount of water in the rock
Clay Volume VCL v/v the clay volume calculations
Water resistivity apparent RWapp v/v the apparent water resistivity in a zone assuming the zone
to be 100% wet

Equations

GR − GR clean
𝑉𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 =
GR clay − GR clean

 If Density is selected as the porosity method

𝜌𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛 − 𝜌𝐵
𝛷𝑡 =
𝜌𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛 − 𝜌𝑓

𝜌𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛 − 𝜌𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦
𝛷𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 =
𝜌𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛 − 𝜌𝑓

𝛷𝐸 = 𝛷𝑡 − (𝛷𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 ∗ 𝑉𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 )

302 | P a g e
 If Sonic is selected as the porosity method

∆t cc = ∆t − Vcl ∗ (∆clay − ∆tclean )

 Raymer-Hunt-Gardner

For a porosity range between 0 and 0.37 (in fraction):

𝛥𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛
𝐶=
(2 ∗ 𝛥𝑡𝑓)

∆𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛 ∆𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛
𝛷𝑡 = 1 − 𝐶 − √𝐶 2 − +
∆𝑡𝑓 ∆𝑡

∆𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛 ∆𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛
𝛷𝐸 = 1 − 𝐶 − √𝐶 2 − +
∆𝑡𝑓 ∆𝑡𝑐𝑐

 Wyllie
∆𝑡 − ∆𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛 1
𝛷𝑡 = ∗
∆𝑡 − ∆𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛 𝐶𝑝

∆𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 − ∆𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛 1
𝛷𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 = ∗
∆𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 − ∆𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛 𝐶𝑝

𝛷𝐸 = 𝛷𝑡 − 𝑉𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 ∗ 𝛷𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦

Apparent water resistivity (RWapp) is calculated :

𝛷𝑚 ∗ 𝑅𝑡
𝑅𝑤𝑎𝑝𝑝 =
𝑎

Archie water saturation (SwU and Sw) is calculated :

303 | P a g e
 Unlimited water saturation

n
a Rw
Swu = ∗
Φm R t

 Sw is limited to be less than or equal to 1.0

How to open “Clay volume” form:

4. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model for clastic module.
5. Press on 'Quick look' > 'Basic analysis' form is opened.

Into ‘Basic analysis’ form:

Curve form

 Input
 Density drop box: the software provides the Density curve from the data or user
can choose the appropriate curve.
 Sonic drop box: the software provides Sonic curve from the data or user can
choose the appropriate curve.
 Gamma ray (Optional) drop box: the software provides the Gamma ray curve
from the data or user can choose the appropriate curve.
 Resistivity drop box: the software provides the Resistivity curve from the data or
user can choose the appropriate curve.
 Output
 Dataset output drop box: allows user to choose the location to save the results
data.
 Porosity drop box: the software provides the porosity result curve name (PHI)
and user also can change this name.
 Water saturation unlimited: the software provides the water saturation unlimited
(Swu) result curve name and user also can change this name.

304 | P a g e
 Water saturation: the software provides the water saturation result curve name
(Sw) and user also can change this name.
 Bulk Volume Water: the software provides the Bulk volume water result curve
name (BVW) and user also can change this name.
 Volume clay: the software provides the clay volume result curve name (VCL) and
user also can change this name.
 Water saturation Apparent: the software provides the Water saturation
Apparent result curve name (Rwapp) and user also can change this name.

Parameters form

Zone-shale

 No: the number of zones.


 Name: the software provides the automatic name or user can change the zone
name by left click on clay volume plot to change the zone name in Zone Properties
or user can change in Zone manager.
 Top: the starting depth of the zone. It depends on user splits zone in the well
depth.
 Bottom: the end of depth of the zone.
 Color: the software provides the automatic color or user can change the color by
left click on clay volume plot to change the color name in Zone Properties or user
can change in Zone manager.
 Lock check box: allows user to choose the zone which they want to calculate clay
volume.
 Sand: is the value of Gamma ray sand with the default value is 10. This value will
be changed when user drag and drop the clean line on clay volume plot.
 Shale: is the value of Gamma ray clay with the default value is 120. This value
will be changed when user drag and drop the clay line on clay volume plot.

Density
305 | P a g e
 Matrix: is the value of sand Density with the default value is 2.65. User can
change this value manually.
 Shale: is the value of clay Density with the default value is 2.3. User can change
this value manually.
 Fluid: is the value of fluid Density with the default value is 1. User can change
this value manually.

Sonic

 Matrix: is the value of sand Sonic with the default value is 55. User can change
this value manually.
 Shale: is the value of clay Sonic with the default value is 125. User can change
this value manually.
 Fluid: is the value of fluid Sonic with the default value is 189. User can change
this value manually.
 Equation drop box: User can choose the wish method. The software provides the
default method is Wyliie.
 Cp: compaction factor with the default value is 1.

Archie

 a: the software provides the default value is 1. However user also changes this
number manually.
 m: the software provides the default value is 2. However user also changes this
number manually.

306 | P a g e
307 | P a g e
 n: the software provides the default value is 2. However user also changes this
number manually.
 Note: a, m, n: Are also called electrical properties get from SCAL (Special core
analysis). The user can get these parameters from laboratory.
 Rw: the software provides water resistivity with the default value is 0.12 and user
can change this number to be suitable with specific field.
 Manage Zonse button: Shows zone management form.
 Show Logplot button: Allows user to show new logplot after updating new
parameters.
 Apply button: Allows user to apply methods as well as parameters to run the
process.
 Run button: Allows user to run the basic analysis.
 Make Plot button: Allows user to show the plot results.
 Close button: Close the form.

308 | P a g e
Clay volume

VSH from Gamma Ray


Introduction

This method calculates the volume of clay with a GR curve only as input. During the
computation performed on one or several zones, the VSH_GR is automatically calculated
and displayed in a specific layout. The following computation methods are proposed:
Linear, Clavier, Larionov (Tertiary rocks), Larionov (older rocks), Stieber variation I,
Stieber variation 2, Stieber Miocene and Pliocene.

Inputs

Name Symbol Unit Description


Gamma ray GR gAPI Gamma ray log reading in zone of interest

Parameters

Name Symbol Unit Description Default value


Gamma ray clean GRclean gAPI Gamma ray log reading 100% sand 10

Gamma ray clay GRclay gAPI Gamma ray log reading 100% clay 120

Method Method choice see Equations for more details Linear

Outputs

Name Symbol Unit Description


Volume of clay VSH_GR v/v Volume of clay in zone of interest

Equations

 GR index calculation:

309 | P a g e
GR − GRclean
𝐺𝑅𝑖𝑛𝑑𝑒𝑥 =
GRclay − GRclean

 Linear method

𝑉𝑆𝐻_𝐺𝑅 = 𝐺𝑅𝑖𝑛𝑑𝑒𝑥

 Clavier method

𝑉𝑆𝐻_𝐺𝑅 = 1.7 − √3.38 − (GRindex + 0.7)2

 Larionov Tertiary rocks method:

𝑉𝑆𝐻_𝐺𝑅 = 0.083 ∗ (2(3.7∗𝐺𝑅𝑖𝑛𝑑𝑒𝑥) − 1)

 Larionov older rocks method:

𝑉𝑆𝐻_𝐺𝑅 = 0.33 ∗ (2(2∗𝐺𝑅𝑖𝑛𝑑𝑒𝑥) − 1)

 Stieber variation I:

𝐺𝑅𝑖𝑛𝑑𝑒𝑥
𝑉𝑆𝐻_𝐺𝑅 =
(2 − 𝐺𝑅𝑖𝑛𝑑𝑒𝑥)

 Stieber: Miocene and Pliocene:

𝐺𝑅𝑖𝑛𝑑𝑒𝑥
𝑉𝑆𝐻_𝐺𝑅 =
(3 − 2 ∗ 𝐺𝑅𝑖𝑛𝑑𝑒𝑥)

 Stiber variation II:

𝐺𝑅𝑖𝑛𝑑𝑒𝑥
𝑉𝑆𝐻_𝐺𝑅 =
(4 − 3 ∗ 𝐺𝑅𝑖𝑛𝑑𝑒𝑥)

Bibliography

Bassiouni Z., Theory measurement, and interpretation of well logs. Society of Petroleum
Engineers, SPE textbook series vol. 4, 1994.

Specific options

310 | P a g e
Show histogram GR

 This option displays a GR histogram (a multi-well histogram if several wells are


involved in the computation) to help the user in selecting the GR_clean and
GR_clay shale values: red lines corresponding to each zone are displayed in the
histogram. By moving them, the GR_clean and GR_clay values are automatically
updated in the table of the Quanti window.

 The following options depend on the column where the user clicks and are applied
to the column only.
 Compute using method minimal: By selecting this option, the quantile 10 of the
interval is assigned to the GR_clean parameters.
 Compute using method maximal: By selecting this option, the quantile 90 of the
interval is assigned to the GR_clay parameters.

311 | P a g e
 Compute using method mean: By selecting this option, the mean of the interval is
assigned to the selected column (GR_clean or GR_clay).
 Compute using method median: By selecting this option, the median of the
interval is assigned to the selected column (GR_clean or GR_clay).

In case several wells are involved in the computation, the minimum value of all the wells
will be kept in the minimal method, a mean value will be calculated in the mean method
and a median value will be calculated in the median method.

How to open “Clay volume” form:

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model for clastic module.

2. Press on 'Clay volume' >Calculate Clay volume by Gamma form is opened.

6. Into ‘Clay volume’ form:

Settings:

 Input drop box: the software provides Gamma ray from input data or user can
choose the wish curve data.
Parameters:
 No: the number of zones.
 Name: the software provides the automatic name or user can change the zone
name by left click on clay volume plot to change the zone name in Zone Properties
or user can change in Zone manager.
 Top: the starting depth of the zone. It depends on user splits zone in the well
depth.
 Bottom: the end of depth of the zone.
 Color: the software provides the automatic color or user can change the color by
left click on clay volume plot to change the color name in Zone Properties or user
can change in Zone manager.

312 | P a g e
 Use check box: allows user to choose the zone which they want to calculate clay
volume.
 Clean: is the value of Gamma ray sand with the default value is 10. This value
will be changed when users drag and drop the clean line on clay volume plot,
Histogram.
 Clay: is the value of Gamma ray clay with the default value is 120. This value will
be changed when users drag and drop the clay line on clay volume plot,
Histogram.
 Method drop box: the software provides the default method is Linear. User can
choose the appropriate method for each zone.
Output:
 Dataset drop box: allows user to choose the location to save the result.
 Curve name: the software provides the result curve name (default VSH_GR) or
user can type the result name manually.

313 | P a g e
 Run button: Allows user to run the clay calculation.
 Show Histogram button: Allows user to show histogram.
 Show Logplot button: Allows user to show the plot result.
 Manage zones button: Allows user to show zone management.
 Close button: Close the form.

VSH from Thermal Neutron


Introduction

This method computes the volume of clay, using a thermal neutron log.

Inputs

Name Symbol Unit Description


Thermal Neutron TNPH v/v Thermal neutron log reading in zone of interest

Parameters

Name Symbol Unit Description Default


value
Neutron clean 𝛷𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛 v/v Thermal neutron log reading in 100% sand 0.1
Neutron clay 𝛷𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 v/v Thermal neutron log reading in 100% clay 0.3

Outputs

Name Symbol Unit Description


Volume of clay VSH_NEU v/v Volume of clay shale in zone of interest

Equation

𝛷𝑁 𝛷𝑁 − 𝛷𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛
𝑉𝑆𝐻𝑁𝐸𝑈 = √ ∗
𝛷𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 𝛷𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 − 𝛷𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛

314 | P a g e
Specific options

Show histogram TNPH

This option displays a TNPH histogram (a multi well histogram if several wells are
involved in the computation) to help the user in selecting the TNPH_clean and
TNPH_clay values: red lines corresponding to each zone are displayed in the histogram.
By moving them, the TNPH_clean and TNPH_clay values are automatically updated in
the table of the form window.

 The following options depend on the column where the user clicks and are
applied to the column only.
 Compute using method minimal: By selecting this option, the quantile 10 of the
interval is assigned to the TNPH_clean parameters.
 Compute using method maximal: By selecting this option, the quantile 90 of the
interval is assigned to the TNPH_clay parameters.

315 | P a g e
 Compute using method mean: By selecting this option, the mean of the interval is
assigned to the selected column (TNPH_clean or TNPH_clay).
 Compute using method median: By selecting this option, the median of the
interval is assigned to the selected column (TNPH_clean or TNPH_clay).

In case several wells are involved in the computation, the minimum value of all the wells
will be kept in the minimal method, a mean value will be calculated in the mean method
and a median value will be calculated in the median method

How to open “Clay volume” form:

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model for clastic module.

2. Press on 'Clay volume' >Calculate Clay volume by Neutron' form is opened.

3. Into ‘Clay volume’ form:

Settings:

 Input drop box: the software provides Thermal Neutron from input data or user
can choose the wish curve data.
Parameters:
 No: the number of zones.
 Name: the software provides the automatic name or user can change the zone
name by left click on clay volume plot to change the zone name in Zone Properties
or user can change in Zone manager.
 Top: the starting depth of the zone. It depends on user splits zone in the well
depth.
 Bottom: the end of depth of the zone.
 Color: the software provides the automatic color or user can change the color by
left click on clay volume plot to change the color name in Zone Properties or user
can change in Zone manager.

316 | P a g e
 Use check box: allows user to choose the zone which they want to calculate clay
volume.
 Clean: is the value of Thermal Neutron sand with the default value is 0.1. This
value will be changed when users drag and drop the clean line on clay volume
plot, histogram.
 Clay: is the value of Thermal Neutron shale with the default value is 0.3. This
value will be changed when users drag and drop the clay line on clay volume plot,
histogram.
Output:
 Dataset drop box: allows user to choose the location to save the result.
 Curve name: the software provides the result curve name (default VSH_NEU) or
user can type the result name manually.

 Run button: Allows user to run the clay calculation.


 Show Histogram button: Allows user to show histogram.

317 | P a g e
 Show Logplot button: Allows user to show the plot result.
 Manage zones button: Allows user to show zone management.
 Close button: Close the form.

VSH from Resistivity


Introduction

This method computes the volume of clay, using a resistivity log.

Inputs

Name Symbol Unit Description


Resistivity R ohm.m Resistivity log reading in zone of interest
Resistivity Clean Rclean ohm.m Resistivity of sand reading in zone of interest

Resistivity Clay Rclay ohm.m Resistivity of clay reading in zone of interest

Parameters

Name Symbol Unit Description Default value


Resistivity Clean Rclean ohm.m Resistivity log reading in 100% sand 10

Resistivity Clay Rclay ohm.m Resistivity log reading in 100% clay 120

Equation Computation method Resistivity log

Outputs

Name Symbol Unit Description


Volume of clay VSH_RES v/v Volume of clay in zone of interest

Equations

Resistivity Log

318 | P a g e
(𝑙𝑜𝑔10(𝑅𝑡) − 𝑙𝑜𝑔10(𝑅𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛))
𝑉𝑆𝐻_𝑅𝐸𝑆 =
(𝑙𝑜𝑔10(𝑅𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦) − 𝑙𝑜𝑔10(𝑅𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛))

Gaymard

(𝑙𝑜𝑔10(𝑅𝑡) − 𝑙𝑜𝑔10(𝑅𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛)) 1
𝑉𝑆𝐻_𝑅𝐸𝑆 = ( )𝐵
(𝑙𝑜𝑔10(𝑅𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦) − 𝑙𝑜𝑔10(𝑅𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛))

Where B=1.0

Specific options

Show histogram RT

 This option displays a RT histogram (a multi well histogram if several wells are
involved in the computation) to help the user in selecting the RT_clean and
RT_clay values: red lines corresponding to each zone are displayed in the
histogram. By moving them, the RT_clean and RT_clay values are automatically
updated in the table of the form window.

319 | P a g e
Computation by minimal, mean and median methods: with these options, a calculation of
GR_Clean and GR_clay is automatically performed: for each zone the minimum value is
kept for GR_clean (the maximum one for GR_clay). In case several wells are involved in
the computation, the minimum value of all the wells will be kept in the minimal method,
a mean value will be calculated in the mean method and a median value will be
calculated in the median method.

How to open “Clay volume” form:

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model for clastic module.

2. Press on 'Clay volume' >Calculate Clay volume by Resistivity' form is opened.

3. Into ‘Clay volume’ form:

Settings:

 Input drop box: the software provides true formation resistivity (RT) from input
data or user can choose the wish curve data.
Parameters:
 No: the number of zones.
 Name: the software provides the automatic name or user can change the zone
name by left click on clay volume plot to change the zone name in Zone Properties
or user can change in Zone manager.
 Top: the starting depth of the zone. It depends on user splits zone in the well
depth.
 Bottom: the end of depth of the zone.
 Color: the software provides the automatic color or user can change the color by
left click on clay volume plot to change the color name in Zone Properties or user
can change in Zone manager.

320 | P a g e
 Use check box: allows user to choose the zone which they want to calculate clay
volume.
 Clean: is the value of sand resistivity with the default value is 10. This value will
be changed when users drag and drop the clean line on clay volume plot,
Histogram.
 Clay: is the value of clay resistivity with the default value is 120. This value will
be changed when users drag and drop the clay line on clay volume plot,
Histogram.
 Method drop box: the software provides the default method is Resistivity Log.
User can choose the appropriate method for each zone.
 B: the default value is 1.user can change this value by manually.
Output:
 Dataset drop box: allows user to choose the location to save the result.
 Curve name: the software provides the result curve name (default VSH_RES) or
user can type the result name manually.

321 | P a g e
 Run button: Allows user to run the clay calculation.
 Show Histogram button: Allows user to show histogram.
 Show Logplot button: Allows user to show the plot result.
 Manage zones button: Allows user to show zone management.
 Close button: Close the form.

322 | P a g e
VSH from Spontaneous potential
This method computes the volume of clay, using the spontaneous potential log.

Inputs

Name Unit Description

Spontaneous potential mV SP log reading in zone of interest

Spontaneous potential mV SP log reading for pure sand

Spontaneous potential mV log reading for pure clay

Parameters

Name Unit Description Default value


SP clean mV SP log reading in 100% sand 10
SP clay mV SP log reading in 100% clay 120

Outputs

Name Unit Description

VSH_SP v/v Volume of clay in zone of interest

323 | P a g e
Equations

𝑆𝑃 − 𝑆𝑃𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛
𝑉𝑆𝐻_𝑆𝑃 =
𝑆𝑃𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 − 𝑆𝑃𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛

Specific options

Show histogram SP

This option displays a SP histogram (a multi well histogram if several wells are involved
in the computation) to help the user in selecting the SP_clean and SP_clay values: red
and green lines corresponding to each zone are displayed in the histogram. By moving
them, the SP_clean and SP_clay values are automatically updated in the table of the form
window.

The following options depend on the column where the user clicks and are applied to the
column only.

324 | P a g e
Compute using method minimal: By selecting this option, the quantile 10 of the interval
is assigned to the SP_clean parameters.

Compute using method maximal: By selecting this option, the quantile 90 of the interval
is assigned to the SP_clay parameters.

Compute using method mean: By selecting this option, the mean of the interval is
assigned to the selected column (SP_clean or SP_clay).

Compute using method median: By selecting this option, the median of the interval is
assigned to the selected column (SP_clean or SP_clay).

In case several wells are involved in the computation, the minimum value of all the wells
will be kept in the minimal method, a mean value will be calculated in the mean method
and a median value will be calculated in the median method.

How to open “Clay volume” form:

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model for clastic module.

2. Press on 'Clay volume' >Calculate Clay volume by SP form is opened.

3. Into ‘Clay volume’ form:

Settings:

 Input drop box: the software provides SP curve from input data or user can
choose the wish curve data.
Parameters:
 No: the number of zones.
 Name: the software provides the automatic name or user can change the zone
name by left click on clay volume plot to change the zone name in Zone Properties
or user can change in Zone manager.

325 | P a g e
 Top: the starting depth of the zone. It depends on user splits zone in the well
depth.
 Bottom: the end of depth of the zone.
 Color: the software provides the automatic color or user can change the color by
left click on clay volume plot to change the color name in Zone Properties or user
can change in Zone manager.
 Use check box: allows user to choose the zone which they want to calculate clay
volume.
 Clean: is the value of sand resistivity with the default value is 10. This value will
be changed when users drag and drop the clean line on clay volume plot,
histogram.
 Clay: is the value of clay resistivity with the default value is 120. This value will
be changed when users drag and drop the clay line on clay volume plot, histogram.
Output:
 Dataset drop box: allows user to choose the location to save the result.
Curve name: the software provides the result curve name (default VSH_SP) or
user can type the result name manually.

326 | P a g e
 Run button: Allows user to run the clay calculation.
 Show Histogram button: Allows user to show histogram.
 Show Logplot button: Allows user to show the plot result.
 Manage zones button: Allows user to show zone management.
 Close button: Close the form.

VSH from Neutron-Density


Introduction

This method computes the volume of clay, using the Neutron and Density logs.

Inputs

Name Unit Description


Neutron porosity v/v Neutron porosity log reading in zone of interest
Bulk density g/cm3 Bulk density log reading in zone of interest
Neutron Porosity clean v/v Neutron porosity log reading in 100% sand

327 | P a g e
Neutron Porosity clay v/v Neutron porosity log reading in 100% clay
Neutron Porosity fluid v/v Neutron porosity log reading in 100% water
Bulk Density clean g/cm3 Bulk density log reading in 100% sand
Bulk Density clay g/cm3 Bulk density log reading in 100% clay
Bulk Density fluid g/cm3 Bulk density log reading in 100% water

Parameters

Name Symbol Unit Description Default


value
Neutron NPHI_clean_2 v/v Neutron porosity log reading in 100% 1
Porosity fluid water
Neutron NPHI_clay v/v Neutron porosity log reading in 100% 0.4
Porosity clay clay
Neutron NPHI_clean_1 v/v Neutron porosity log reading in 100% -0.01
Porosity clean sand
Bulk Density RHOB_clean_2 g/cm3 Bulk density log reading in 100% 1
fluid water
Bulk Density RHOB_clay g/cm3 Bulk density log reading in 100% clay 2.4
clay
Bulk Density RHOB_clean_1 g/cm3 Bulk density log reading in 100% sand 2.65
clean

Outputs

Name Symbol Unit Description


Volume of clay VSH_NeuDen v/v Volume of clay computed in zone of interest

Equations

X0=NPHI clean_1

328 | P a g e
X1=NPHI+M1*(RHOBclean_1 - RHOB)

X2=NPHIClay+M1*(RHOBclean_1 -RHOBclay)

𝑁𝑃𝐻𝐼𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛_2 − 𝑁𝑃𝐻𝐼𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛_1
𝑀1 =
𝑅𝐻𝑂𝐵𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛_2 − 𝑅𝐻𝑂𝐵𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛_1

(𝑋1 − 𝑋0)
𝑉𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 =
(𝑋2 − 𝑋0)

Note: If (X2-X0) is equal to zero.

Specific options

Show Cross-plot NPHI-RHOB

 This option displays a NPHI-RHOB Cross-plot (a multiwell Cross-plot if several


wells are involved in the computation) to help the user in selecting the
RHOB_clean_1, NPHI_clean_1 and RHOB_clay, NPHI_clay values: points
corresponding to each zone are displayed in the Cross-plot. By moving them, the
sand and clay values are automatically updated in the table of the form window.

329 | P a g e
 The appearance of the clean_1/clay/clean_2 points (type and color) and of the
lines that connect the points can be modified in the Properties window.

How to open “Clay volume” form:

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model for clastic module.

2. Press on 'Clay volume' >Calculate Clay volume by "Neutron-Density" form is


opened.

3. Into ‘Clay volume’ form:

Settings:

 Neutron porosity drop box: the software provides Neutron curve from input data
or user can choose the wish curve data.
 Bulk Density drop box: the software provides Density curve from input data or
user can choose the wish curve data.
Parameters:
 No: the number of zones.
 Name: the software provides the automatic name or user can change the zone
name by left click on clay volume plot to change the zone name in Zone Properties
or user can change in Zone manager.
 Top: the starting depth of the zone. It depends on user splits zone in the well
depth.
 Bottom: the end of depth of the zone.
 Color: the software provides the automatic color or user can change the color by
left click on clay volume plot to change the color name in Zone Properties or user
can change in Zone manager.
 Use check box: allows user to choose the zone which they want to calculate clay
volume.

330 | P a g e
 In the Neutron porosity
 Clean_1: is the value of Neutron Porosity sand with the default value is -0.01.
This value will be changed when users drag and drop the overlay line on Neutron-
Density log track, Crossplot, Histogram.
 Clay: is the value of Neutron Porosity clay with the default value is 0.4. This
value will be changed when users drag and drop the overlay line on Neutron-
Density log track. Crossplot, Histogram.
 Clean_2: is the value of Neutron Porosity fluid with the default value is 1.
 In the Bulk Density
 Clean_1: is the value of Bulk Density Sand with the default value is 2.65 . This
value will be changed when users drag and drop the overlay line on Neutron-
Density log track, Crossplot, Histogram.
 Clay: is the value of Bulk Density clay with the default value is 2.4. This value
will be changed when users drag and drop the overlay line on Neutron-Density log
track, Crossplot, Histogram.
 Clean_2: is the value of Bulk Density fluid with the default value is 1.
Output:
 Dataset drop box: allows user to choose the location to save the result.
 Curve name: the software provides the result curve name (default VSH_NeuDen)
or user can type the result name manually.

331 | P a g e
 Run button: Allows user to run the clay calculation.
 Show Histogram button: Allows user to show histogram.
 Show Logplot button: Allows user to show the plot result.
 Manage zones button: Allows user to show zone management.
 Close button: Close the form.

VSH from Density-Sonic


Introduction

This method computes the volume of shale, using the sonic and density logs.

Inputs

Name Symbol Unit Description

Bulk density RHOB g/cm3 Bulk density log reading in zone of interest

332 | P a g e
DT
Compressional slowness us/ft Sonic log reading in zone of interest

Compressional slowness Clean


DT_Clean_1 us/ft Sonic log reading in 100% sand

Compressional slowness Clay DT _clay us/ft Sonic log reading in 100% clay

Compressional slowness Fluid DT _clean_2 us/ft Sonic log reading in 100% water

RHOB
Bulk density clean _clean_1 g/cm3 Bulk density log reading in 100% sand

Bulk density clay RHOB _clay g/cm3 Bulk density log reading in 100% clay

Bulk density Fluid RHOB_clean_2 g/cm3 Bulk density log reading in 100% water

Parameters

Name Symbol Unit Description Default value

RHOB_clean_2 𝜌f g/cm3 Bulk density log reading in 100% water 1.0

RHOB _clay 𝜌clay g/cm3 Bulk density log reading in 100% clay 2.40

RHOB _clean_1 𝜌clean g/cm3 Bulk density log reading in 100% sand 2.65

DT_clean_2 𝛥tf us/ft Sonic log reading in 100% water 189

DT_clay 𝛥tclay us/ft Sonic log reading in 100% clay 100

DT_clean_1 𝛥tclean us/ft Sonic log reading in 100% sand 50

Outputs

333 | P a g e
Name Symbol Unit Description
Volume of clay VSH_SonDen v/v Volume of clay in zone of interest

Equations

A= 𝜌B * (𝛥tclean - 𝛥tf) - 𝛥t * (𝜌clean - 𝜌f)- 𝛥tclean + 𝜌clean*𝛥tf

B= (𝛥tclean-𝛥tf) * (𝜌clay-𝜌f) - (𝜌clean-𝜌f) * (𝛥tclay-𝛥tf)

𝐴
𝑉𝑆𝐻_𝑆𝑜𝑛𝐷𝑒𝑛 =
𝐵

Specific options

Show Cross-plot DT-RHOB

This option displays a DT-RHOB Cross-plot (a multiwell Cross-plot if several wells are
involved in the computation) to help the user in selecting the RHOB_clean, DT_clean
and RHOB_clay, DT_clay values: points corresponding to each zone are displayed in the
Cross-plot. By moving them, the matrix and shale values are automatically updated in the
table of the form window.

334 | P a g e
How to open “Clay volume ” form:

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model for clastic module.

2. Press on 'Clay volume' >Calculate Clay volume by "Density-Sonic" form is


opened.

3. Into ‘Clay volume’ form:

Settings:

 Density drop box: the software provides Density curve from input data or user
can choose the wish curve data.
 Sonic drop box: the software provides Sonic curve from input data or user can
choose the wish curve data.
Parameters:
 No: the number of zones.

335 | P a g e
 Name: the software provides the automatic name or user can change the zone
name by left click on clay volume plot to change the zone name in Zone Properties
or user can change in Zone manager.
 Top: the starting depth of the zone. It depends on user splits zone in the well
depth.
 Bottom: the end of depth of the zone.
 Color: the software provides the automatic color or user can change the color by
left click on clay volume plot to change the color name in Zone Properties or user
can change in Zone manager.
 Use check box: allows user to choose the zone which they want to calculate clay
volume.
 In the Bulk Density
 Clean_1: is the value of Bulk Density Sand with the default value is 2.65 . This
value will be changed when users drag and drop the overlay line on Density-Sonic
log track, Crossplot, Histogram.
 Clay: is the value of Bulk Density clay with the default value is 2.4. This value
will be changed when users drag and drop the overlay line on Density-Sonic log
track, Crossplot, Histogram.
 Clean_2: is the value of Bulk Density fluid with the default value is 1.
 In the Sonic
 Clean_1: is the value of Sonic of Sand with the default value is 50. This value will
be changed when users drag and drop the overlay line on Density-Sonic log track,
histogram, crossplot.
 Clay: is the value of Sonic of clay with the default value is 100. This value will be
changed when users drag and drop the overlay line on Density-Sonic log track,
histogram, crossplot.
 Clean_2: is the value of Sonic fluid with the default value is 189.
Output:

336 | P a g e
 Dataset drop box: allows user to choose the location to save the result.
 Curve name: the software provides the result curve name (default VSH_SonDen)
or user can type the result name manually.

 Run button: Allows user to run the clay calculation.


 Show Histogram button: Allows user to show histogram.
 Show Logplot button: Allows user to show the plot result.
 Manage zones button: Allows user to show zone management.
 Close button: Close the form.

VSH from Neutron-Sonic


Introduction

This method computes the volume of clay, using the Neutron and Sonic logs.

Inputs

337 | P a g e
Name Unit Description

Neutron porosity v/v Neutron porosity log reading in zone of interest


Compressional slowness us/ft Sonic log reading in zone of interest
Neutron porosity clean v/v Neutron porosity log reading in the sand
Neutron porosity clay v/v Neutron porosity log reading in the clay
Neutron porosity Fluid v/v Neutron porosity log reading in the fluid
Compressional slowness clean us/ft Sonic log reading in the sand
Compressional slowness clay us/ft Sonic log reading in the clay

Compressional slowness Fluid us/ft Sonic log reading in the fluid

Parameters

Symbol Default
Name Unit Description
value

NPHI_clean_2 𝛷Nf v/v Neutron porosity log reading in 100% water 1.0

NPHI_clay 𝛷Nclay v/v Neutron porosity log reading in 100% clay 0.4

NPHI_clean_1 𝛷Nclean v/v Neutron porosity log reading in 100% sand -0.01

DT_clean_2 𝛥tf us/ft Sonic log reading in 100% water 189

DT_clay 𝛥tclay us/ft Sonic log reading in 100% clay 100

DT_clean_1 𝛥tclean us/ft Sonic log reading in 100% sand 50

Outputs

Name Symbol Unit Description


Volume of clay VSH_NeuSon v/v Volume of clay in zone of interest

Equations
338 | P a g e
A= 𝛷N * (𝛥tclean - 𝛥tf) -𝛥t * (𝛷Nclean - 𝛷Nf)- 𝛥tclean + 𝛷Nclean*𝛥tf

B= (𝛥tclean- 𝛥tf) * (𝛷Nclay- 𝛷Nf) - (𝛷Nclean- 𝛷Nf) * (𝛥tclay-𝛥tf)

𝐴
𝑉𝑆𝐻_𝑁𝑒𝑢𝑆𝑜𝑛 =
𝐵
Specific options

Show Cross-plot NPHI - DT

This option displays a NPHI-DT Cross-plot (a multi well Cross-plot if several wells are
involved in the computation) to help the user in selecting the NPHI_lean, DT_clean and
NPHI_clay, DT_clay values: points corresponding to each zone are displayed in the
Cross-plot. By moving them, the clean and clay values are automatically updated in the
table of the form window.

339 | P a g e
How to open “Clay volume” form:

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model for clastic module.

2. Press on 'Clay volume' > Calculate Clay volume by "Neutron-Sonic" form is


opened.

3. Into ‘Clay volume’ form:

Settings:

 Neutron porosity drop box: the software provides Neutron curve from input data
or user can choose the wish curve data.
 Sonic drop box: the software provides Sonic curve from input data or user can
choose the wish curve data.
Parameters:
 No: the number of zones.
 Name: the software provides the automatic name or user can change the zone
name by left click on clay volume plot to change the zone name in Zone Properties
or user can change in Zone manager.
 Top: the starting depth of the zone. It depends on user splits zone in the well
depth.
 Bottom: the end of depth of the zone.
 Color: the software provides the automatic color or user can change the color by
left click on clay volume plot to change the color name in Zone Properties or user
can change in Zone manager.
 Use check box: allows user to choose the zone which they want to calculate clay
volume.
 In the Sonic

340 | P a g e
 Clean_1: is the value of Sonic of Sand with the default value is 50 . This value
will be changed when users drag and drop the overlay line on Neutron-Sonic log
track,Crossplot, Histogram.
 Clay: is the value of Sonic of clay with the default value is 100. This value will be
changed when users drag and drop the overlay line on Neutron-Sonic log track,
Crossplot, Histogram.
 Clean_2: is the value of Sonic fluid with the default value is 189.
 In the Neutron porosity
 Clean_1: is the value of Neutron Porosity sand with the default value is -0.01.
This value will be changed when users drag and drop the overlay line on Neutron-
Sonic log track, histogram, crossplot.
 Clay: is the value of Neutron Porosity clay with the default value is 0.4. This
value will be changed when users drag and drop the overlay line on Neutron-Sonic
log track, histogram, crossplot.
 Clean_2: is the value of Neutron Porosity fluid with the default value is 1.
Output:
 Dataset drop box: allows user to choose the location to save the result.
 Curve name: the software provides the result curve name (default VSH_NeuSon)
or user can type the result name manually.

341 | P a g e
 Run button: Allows user to run the clay calculation.
 Show Histogram button: Allows user to show histogram.
 Show Logplot button: Allows user to show the plot result.
 Manage zones button: Allows user to show zone management.
 Close button: Close the form.

Final Clay Volume


Introduction

This method calculates the volume of shale as a combination of different Volume of


shale computed from different methods. The following computed methods are proposed:
Arithmetic mean, Median, Minimum, Maximum.

Inputs

Name Unit Description

Volume of clay v/v Input clay volume. In the family alias selection window, add as many time as needed the inputs.

342 | P a g e
Parameters

Name Unit Description

VCL Merged v/v The proposed methods are: Arithmetic mean, Median, Minimum, Maximum
Method

Outputs

Name Unit Description


VCL_MIN v/ v The minimum of clay volume
VCL_AVE v/v The average of clay volume
VCL_MIX v/v The mixed of clay volume

Equations

Arithmetic mean:

1 1
𝑥 = ∑𝑛𝑖=1 𝑥𝑖 = (𝑥1 + ⋯ + 𝑥𝑛 )
𝑛 𝑛

Median: Median value of all the variables used as inputs

Minimum: Minimum value of all the variables used as inputs

Maximum: Maximum value of all the variables used as inputs

How to open "Clay volume Final" form:

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model for clastic module.

2. Press on "Final Clay volume" > "Calculate final clay volume" form is opened.

3. Into "Final clay volume" form:

343 | P a g e
 Statistics setting

Curve: User can choose the clay volume curve which user wants to calculate clay final.

Min Value check box: the minimum value of the final clay volume in interest zone.

Max Value check box: the maximum value of the final clay volume in interest zone.

Average check box: the average value of the final clay volume in interest zone.

Median check box: the median is the number separating the higher half of a data sample
or a probability distribution, from the lower half.

P10 check box: the value of the final clay volume for which there is only a 10% chance
that the true value exceeds the value. Often called the high case.

P50 check box: the value of the final clay volume for which there is a 50% chance that
the true value lies either above or below the value.

P90 check box: the value of the final clay volume for which there is a 90% chance that
the true value exceeds the value. Often called the low case.

 Final
 In zone

Name: the software provides the zone name based on the zone name in clay volume. It
will be changed when user changes the zone name in clay volume.

In name "+" icon: click "+" icon, the software presents the statistic of individual method.
In this table includes Use check box: Allows user chooses the wishes method to calculate
Vclay for each zone.

Method, Curve name, min, max, Average, Median, P10, P50, P90 value of each method.

Top: the starting depth of the zone. It depends on user splits zone in the well depth in
calculation clay volume.

344 | P a g e
Bottom: the end of depth of the zone.

 In Final

Average method drop box: the software provides the methods names which are used to
calculate clay volume. The software provides 3 methods are Mean, Lateral and Medial.
User can choose the wish method to calculate clay volume. When the user chooses the
wish method, the statistic of this method will be shown in Min, Max, Average,
Median value.

Mix drop box: the software provides the methods names which are used to calculate clay
volume. The software provides 2 methods are Minimum and Average. User can choose
the wish method to calculate clay volume. When user chooses the wish method, the
statistic of this method will be shown in Min, Max, Average, Median value.

Min, Max, Average, Median column, P10, P50, P90: shows the statistic value of each
zone.

 Output

Dataset: allows user to choose location to save the final curve.

Minimum drop box: the software provides the minimum clay volume curve name is
VCL_MIN. However user can change this name manually.

Average drop box: the software provides the average clay volume curve name is
VCL_AVE. However user can change this name manually.

Minimum drop box: the software provides the Mixed clay volume curve name is
VCL_MIX. However user can change this name manually.

345 | P a g e
Apply button: Apply the chosen method for calculating final clay volume.

Run button: Run the final calculation.

Close button: Close final clay volume form.

346 | P a g e
Porosity

Total and Effective Porosity from Density


Introduction

This method computes the Total and Effective porosity using the Density log.

Inputs

Name Symbol Unit Description


Bulk Density 𝜌B g/cm3 Density log reading in zone of interest

Clay volume Vclay v/v Calculated clay volume


Bulk Density Fluid 𝜌f g/cm3 Bulk density of the sand in the reading tool zone

Bulk Density clean 𝜌clean g/cm3 Bulk density of the fluid in the reading tool zone (available
only in case there is no HC correction applied)
Bulk Density clay 𝜌clay g/cm3 Bulk density of clay

Parameters

Name Symbol Unit Description Default value


Bulk Density clean 𝜌clean g/cm3 Density log reading in 100% sand 2.65

Bulk Density Fluid 𝜌f g/cm3 Density log reading in 100% water 1

Bulk Density clay 𝜌clay d/cm3 Density log reading in 100% clay 2.3

Outputs

Name Symbol Unit Description


Total Porosity PHIT_D v/v Total Porosity of Density
Effective Porosity PHIE_D v/v Effective porosity of Density
Matrix density RHO_MA v/v Matrix Density

347 | P a g e
Equations

𝜌𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛 − 𝜌𝐵
𝛷𝑇 =
𝜌𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛 − 𝜌𝑓

𝜌𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛 − 𝜌𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦
𝛷𝑇𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 =
𝜌𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛 − 𝜌𝑓

𝛷𝐸 = 𝛷𝑇 − (𝛷𝑇𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 ∗ 𝑉𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 )

How to open "Porosity" form:

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model for clastic module.

2. Press on 'Porosity' >Calculate Porosity by "Density" form is opened.

3. Into ‘Porosity'form:

Settings
 Density drop box: The software automatically provides Density curve
from the input data or user can choose the appropriate curve.
 Clay volume drop box: The software automatically provides clay volume
value from the result of clay volume or user can choose the appropriate
curve.
Parameters
 No: the number of zones.
 Name: the software provides the zone name based on the zone name in clay
volume. It will be changed when user changes the zone name in clay
volume.
 Top: the starting depth of the zone. It depends on user splits zone in the
well depth in calculation clay volume.

348 | P a g e
 Bottom: the end of depth of the zone.
 Color: the software provides the color based on zone color in clay volume.
This color will be changed when user changes zone color in calculation
clay volume.
 Use check box: allows user to choose the zone which they want to
calculate porosity.
 Clean: is the value of sand Density with the default value is 2.65. User can
change this value manually. This value will be changed when users drag
and drop the control line on log track, histogram.
 Clay: is the value of clay Density with the default value is 2.3. User can
change this value manually. This value will be changed when users drag
and drop the control line on log track, histogram.
 Fluid: is the value of fluid with the default value is 1. User can change this
value manually.

Outputs

 Dataset drop box: allows user to choose the location to save the result.
 Porosity: the software provides the name for total porosity (PHIT_D)
,effective porosity (PHIE_D) and clean Density (RHO_MA). User also
changes these names by manually.

349 | P a g e
 Run button: Allows user to run the porosity calculation.
 Show Logplot button: Allows user to show the plot result.
 Manage zones button: Allows user to show zone management.
 Close button: Close the form.

Total and Effective Porosity from Neutron


Introduction

This method computes the Total and Effective porosity using the Neutron log.

Inputs

Name Symbol Unit Description


Neutron Neu v/v Neutron log reading in zone of interest
Clay volume Vclay v/v Calculated clay volume
Neutron clean Neuclean v/v Neutron sand of the sand in the reading tool zone
Neutron fluid Neuf v/v Neutron sand of the fluid in the reading tool zone
Neutron clay Neuclay v/v Neutron sand of the clay in the reading tool zone

350 | P a g e
Parameters

Name Symbol Unit Description Default value


Neutron clean Neuclean v/v Density log reading in 100% sand -0.01
Neutron Fluid Neuf v/v Density log reading in 100% water 1
Neutron clay Neuclay v/v Density log reading in 100% clay 0.4

Outputs

Name Symbol Unit Description


Total Porosity PHIT_N v/v Total Porosity
Effective Porosity PHIE_N v/v Effective porosity
Matrix neutron PHI_clean v/v Matrix neutron

Equations

Neu − Neuclean
ΦT =
Neuf − Neuclean

Neu − Neuclean Neuclay − Neuclean


ΦE = − Vclay ∗
Neuf − Neuclean Neuf − Neuclean

How to open “Porosity” form:

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model for clastic module.

2. Press on 'Porosity' >Calculate Porosity by "Neutron" form is opened.

3. Into ‘Porosity’ form:

351 | P a g e
Settings
 Neutron drop box: The software automatically provides Neutron curve
from the input data or user can choose the appropriate curve.
 Clay volume drop box: The software automatically provides clay volume
value from the result of clay volume or user can choose the appropriate
curve.
Parameters
 No: the number of zones.
 Name: the software provides the zone name based on the zone name in clay
volume. It will be changed when user changes the zone name in clay
volume.
 Top: the starting depth of the zone. It depends on user splits zone in the
well depth in calculation clay volume.
 Bottom: the end of depth of the zone.
 Color: the software provides the color based on zone color in clay volume.
This color will be changed when user changes zone color in calculation
clay volume.
 Use check box: allows user to choose the zone which they want to
calculate porosity.
 Clean: is the value of sand Neutron with the default value is -0.01. User
can change this value manually. This value will be changed when users
drag and drop the control line on log track, histogram.
 Clay: is the value of clay Neutron with the default value is 0.4. User can
change this value manually. This value will be changed when users drag
and drop the control line on log track, histogram.
 Fluid: is the value of fluid with the default value is 1. User can change this
value manually.

Outputs

352 | P a g e
 Dataset drop box: allows user to choose the location to save the result.
 Porosity: the software provides the name for total porosity (PHIT_N)
,effective porosity (PHIE_N) and clean Density (PHI_clean). User also
changes these names by manually.

 Run button: Allows user to run the porosity calculation.


 Show Logplot button: Allows user to show the plot result.
 Manage zones button: Allows user to show zone management.
 Close button: Close the form.

Total and Effective porosity from Sonic


Introduction

This method computes the Total and Effective porosity using the Sonic log.

Inputs

353 | P a g e
Name Symbol Unit Description
Compressional slowness 𝛥t Us/ft Compressional slowness log reading in zone of
interest
Clay volume Vclay v/v Calcualated Volume of clay
Compressionnal slowness clean 𝛥tclean Us/ft Compressionnal slowness of the sand
Compressionnal slowness fluid 𝛥tf Us/ft Compressionnal slowness of the fluid

Compressionnal slowness clay 𝛥tclay Us/ft Compressionnal slowness of the clay

Parameters

Name Symbol Unit Description Default value


Compressional 𝛥tclean Us/ft Compressional slowness log 55
slowness clean reading in 100% sand
Compressional 𝛥tf Us/ft Compressional slowness log 189
slowness fluid reading in 100% water
Compressional 𝛥clay Us/ft Compressional slowness log 140
slowness clay reading in 100% clay
Sonic Method unitless Used for the equation type of the Wyliie
computation method
Compaction correction Cp unitless Compaction correction used in 1
the PHIT computation
Hydrocarbon Sonic Us/ft Compressional slowness of 265
Hydrocarbon

Outputs

Name Symbol Unit Description


Total porosity PHIT_S v/v Total Porosity
Effective porosity PHIE_S v/v Effective porosity
Matrix sonic DT_MA Matrix sonic

354 | P a g e
Equations

∆t cc = ∆t − Vcl ∗ (∆clay − ∆tclean )

 Raymer-Hunt-Gardner

For a porosity range between 0 and 0.37 (in fraction):

𝛥𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛
𝐶=
(2 ∗ ∆𝑡𝑓 )

∆𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛 ∆𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛
𝛷𝑡 = 1 − 𝐶 − √𝐶 2 − +
∆𝑡𝑓 ∆𝑡

∆𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛 ∆𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛
𝛷𝐸 = 1 − 𝐶 − √𝐶 2 − +
∆𝑡𝑓 ∆𝑡𝑐𝑐

 Wyllie
∆𝑡 − ∆𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛 1
𝛷𝑡 = ∗
∆𝑡 − ∆𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛 𝐶𝑝

∆𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 − ∆𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛 1
𝛷𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 = ∗
∆𝑡𝑓 − ∆𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛 𝐶𝑝

𝛷𝐸 = 𝛷𝑡 − 𝑉𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 ∗ 𝛷𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦

How to open “Porosity” form:

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model for clastic module.

355 | P a g e
2. Press on 'Porosity' >Calculate Porosity by "Sonic" form is opened.

3. Into ‘Porosity’ form:

Settings
 Sonic drop box: The software automatically provides Sonic curve from the
input data or user can choose the appropriate curve.
 Clay volume drop box: The software automatically provides clay volume
value from the result of clay volume or user can choose the appropriate
curve.
Parameters
 No: the number of zones.
 Name: the software provides the zone name based on the zone name in clay
volume. It will be changed when user changes the zone name in clay
volume.
 Top: the starting depth of the zone. It depends on user splits zone in the
well depth in calculation clay volume.
 Bottom: the end of depth of the zone.
 Color: the software provides the color based on zone color in clay volume.
This color will be changed when user change zone color in calculation clay
volume.
 Use check box: allows user to choose the zone which they want to
calculate porosity.
 Clean: is the value of sand Sonic with the default value is 55. User can
change this value manually. This value will be changed when users drag
and drop the control line on log track, histogram.
 Clay: is the value of clay Sonic with the default value is 125. User can
change this value manually. This value will be changed when users drag
and drop the control line on log track, histogram.

356 | P a g e
 Fluid: is the value of fluid Sonic with the default value is 189. User can
change this value manually.
 Method drop box: User can choose the wish method. The software
provides the default method is Wyliie.
 Cp: compaction factor with the default value is 1.

Outputs

 Dataset drop box: allows user to choose the location to save the result.
 Porosity: the software provides the name for total porosity (PHIT_S)
,effective porosity (PHIE_S) and clean Sonic (DT_MA). User also changes
these names by manually.

 Run button: Allows user to run the porosity calculation.


 Show Logplot button: Allows user to show the plot result.

357 | P a g e
 Manage zones button: Allows user to show zone management.
 Close button: Close the form.

Total and Effective Porosity from Density-Neutron


Introduction

This method computes the Total and Effective porosity using neutron and density logs.

Inputs

Name Symbol Unit Description


Bulk Density 𝜌B g/cm3 Density log reading in zone of interest
Bulk Density Fluid 𝜌f g/cm3 Bulk density of the sand in the reading tool zone
Bulk Density clean 𝜌clean g/cm3 Bulk density of the fluid in the reading tool zone
(available only in case there is no HC correction
applied)
Bulk Density clay 𝜌clay g/cm3 Bulk density of clay
Neutron Neu v/v Neutron log reading in zone of interest
Neutron clean Neuclean v/v Neutron sand of the sand in the reading tool zone
Neutron fluid Neuf v/v Neutron sand of the fluid in the reading tool zone
Neutron clay Neuclay v/v Neutron sand of the clay in the reading tool zone
Clay volume Vclay v/v Calculated clay volume

Parameters

Name Symbol Unit Description Default value


Bulk Density clean 𝜌clean g/cm3 Density log reading in 100% sand 2.65
Bulk Density Fluid 𝜌f g/cm3 Density log reading in 100% water 1
Bulk Density clay 𝜌clay g/cm3 Density log reading in 100% clay 2.3
Neutron clean Neuclean v/v Density log reading in 100% sand -0.015
Neutron Fluid Neuf v/v Density log reading in 100% water 1
Neutron clay Neuclay v/v Density log reading in 100% clay 0.35

358 | P a g e
Outputs

Name Symbol Unit Description

Total Porosity PHIT_ND v/v Total Porosity of Neutron-Density

Effective Porosity PHIE_ND v/v Effective porosity of Neutron-Density

Matrix density RHO_MA v/v Matrix Density

Equations

Neutron porosity

Neu − Neuclean
𝛷T =
Neuf − Neuclean

Neu − Neuclean Neuclay − Neuclean


𝛷E = − Vclay ∗
Neuf − Neuclean Neuf − Neuclean

Density porosity

𝜌𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛 − 𝜌𝐵
𝛷𝑇 =
𝜌𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛 − 𝜌𝑓

𝜌𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛 − 𝜌𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦
𝛷𝑇𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 =
𝜌𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛 − 𝜌𝑓

𝛷𝐸 = 𝛷𝑇 − (𝛷𝑇𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 ∗ 𝑉𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 )

Density-Neutron porosity

Using the input Mineral Model parameter, the program calculates the porosity for each
mineral from the neutron and density logs. For the Sand/Limestone/Dolomite model,
based on the matrix density, whether the Sand/Limestone or Limestone/Dolomite model
should be used. Once the four porosities (density porosity for 2 minerals and neutron

359 | P a g e
porosity for 2 minerals) have been calculated, using the equations in Density Porosity
Model and Neutron Porosity Model, the crossplot porosity is calculated as follows:

𝛷𝑇𝑁1 − 𝛷𝑇𝐷1
𝛷𝑇 = 𝛷𝑇𝐷1 +
𝛷𝑇 − 𝛷𝑇𝑁2
1 − 𝑁1
𝛷𝑇𝐷1 − 𝛷𝑇𝐷2

𝛷𝐸𝑁1 − 𝛷𝐸𝐷1
𝛷𝐸 = 𝛷𝐸𝐷1 +
𝛷𝐸 − 𝛷𝐸𝑁2
1 − 𝑁1
𝛷𝐸𝐷1 − 𝛷𝐸𝐷2

Where:

𝛷𝑇𝑁1 Neutron corrected total porosity for matrix 1

𝛷𝑇𝑁2 Neutron corrected total porosity for matrix 2

𝛷𝑇𝐷1 Density corrected total porosity for matrix 1

𝛷𝑇𝐷2 Density corrected total porosity for matrix 2

𝛷𝐸𝑁1 Neutron corrected effective porosity for matrix 1

𝛷𝐸𝑁2 Neutron corrected effective porosity for matrix 2

𝛷𝐸𝐷1 Density corrected effective porosity for matrix 1

𝛷𝐸𝐷2 Density corrected effective porosity for matrix 2

How to open Neutron-Density form

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model for clastic module.

2. Press on "Porosity" >Calculate Porosity by "Neutron-Density" form is opened.

3. Into "Porosity" form:

360 | P a g e
Settings
 Density drop box: The software automatically provides Density curve from the
input data or user can choose the appropriate curve.
 Neutron drop box: The software automatically provides Neutron curve from the
input data or user can choose the appropriate curve.
 Clay volume drop box: The software automatically provides Clay volume value
from the calculated clay volume or user can choose the appropriate curve.
Parameters
 No: the number of zones.
 Name: the software provides the zone name based on the zone name in clay
volume. It will be changed when user changes the zone name in clay volume.
 Top: the starting depth of the zone. It depends on user splits zone in the well depth
in calculation clay volume.
 Bottom: the end of depth of the zone.
 Color: the software provides the color based on zone color in clay volume. This
color will be changed when user changes zone color in calculation clay volume.
 Use check box: allows user to choose the zone which they want to calculate
porosity.
In the Neutron porosity
 Clean: is the value of Neutron Porosity sand with the default value is -0.015. This
value will be changed when users drag and drop the control line on Neutron-
Density log track, histogram or overlay line on crossplot.
 Clay: is the value of Neutron Porosity clay with the default value is 0.35. This
value will be changed when users drag and drop the control line on Neutron-
Density log track, histogram or overlay line on crossplot.
 Fluid: is the value of Neutron Porosity fluid with the default value is 1.
In the Bulk Density

361 | P a g e
 Clean: is the value of Bulk Density Sand with the default value is 2.65. This value
will be changed when users drag and drop the control line on Neutron-Density log
track, histogram or overlay line on crossplot.
 Clay: is the value of Bulk Density clay with the default value is 2.4. This value
will be changed when users drag and drop the control line on Neutron-Density log
track, histogram or overlay line on crossplot.
 Fluid: is the value of Bulk Density fluid with the default value is 1.

Outputs

 Dataset drop box: allows user to choose the location to save the result.
 Porosity: the software provides the name for total porosity (PHIT_ND) ,effective
porosity (PHIE_ND) and Neutron-Density matrix (RHO_MA). Users also change
these names by manually.

 Run button: Allows user to run the porosity calculation.

362 | P a g e
 Show Logplot button: Allows user to show the plot result.
 Manage zones button: Allows user to show zone management.
 Close button: Close the form.

Total and Effective Porosity from Neutron-Sonic


Introduction

This method computes the total effective porosity using neutron and sonic logs, as well as
the volume of shale.

Inputs

Name Symbol Unit Description


Compressional slowness 𝛥t Us/ft Compressional slowness log reading in zone of interest
Compressionnal slowness 𝛥tclean Us/ft Compressionnal slowness of the sand
clean
Compressionnal slowness 𝛥t Us/ft Compressionnal slowness of the fluid
f
fluid
Compressionnal slowness 𝛥tclay Us/ft Compressionnal slowness of the clay
clay
Neutron Neu v/v Neutron log reading in zone of interest
Neutron clean Neuclean v/v Neutron sand of the sand in the reading tool zone
Neutron fluid Neuf v/v Neutron sand of the fluid in the reading tool zone
Neutron clay Neuclay v/v Neutron sand of the clay in the reading tool zone
Clay volume Vclay v/v Calcualated Volume of clay

Parameters

Name Symbol Unit Description Default value

Compressional slowness clean 𝛥tclean Us/ft Compressional slowness log reading 55


in 100% sand

363 | P a g e
Compressional slowness fluid 𝛥tf Us/ft Compressional slowness log reading 189
in 100% water
Compressional slowness clay 𝛥tclay Us/ft Compressional slowness log reading 140
in 100% clay
Neutron clean Neuclean v/v Density log reading in 100% sand -0.015

Neutron Fluid Neuf v/v Density log reading in 100% water 1

Neutron clay Neuclay v/v Density log reading in 100% clay 0.35

Output

Name Unit Description


Total Porosity v/v Total porosity of Neutron-Sonic
Effective Porosity v/v Effective porosity of Neutron-Sonic
Matrix density Us/ft Matrix

Equations:

Neutron porosity

Neu − Neuclean
ΦT =
Neuf − Neuclean

Neu − Neuclean Neuclay − Neuclean


ΦE = − Vclay ∗
Neuf − Neuclean Neuf − Neuclean

Sonic Porosity

∆t cc = ∆t − Vcl ∗ (∆clay − ∆tclean )

 Raymer-Hunt-Gardner

364 | P a g e
For a porosity range between 0 and 0.37 (in fraction):

𝛥𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛
𝐶=
(2 ∗ 𝛥𝑡𝑓)

∆𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛 ∆𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛
𝛷𝑡 = 1 − 𝐶 − √𝐶 2 − +
∆𝑡𝑓 ∆𝑡

∆𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛 ∆𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛
𝛷𝐸 = 1 − 𝐶 − √𝐶 2 − +
∆𝑡𝑓 ∆𝑡𝑐𝑐

 Wyllie

∆𝑡 − ∆𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛 1
𝛷𝑡 = ∗
∆𝑡 − ∆𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛 𝐶𝑝

∆𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 − ∆𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛 1
𝛷𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 = ∗
∆𝑡𝑓 − ∆𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑛 𝐶𝑝

𝛷𝐸 = 𝛷𝑡 − 𝑉𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 ∗ 𝛷𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦

Neutron-Sonic Porosity

Using the input Mineral Model parameter, the program calculates the porosity for each
mineral from the neutron and sonic logs. For the Sand/Limestone/Dolomite model, based
on the matrix sonic, whether the Sand/Limestone or Limestone/Dolomite model should
be used. Once the four porosities (Neutron porosity for 2 minerals and Sonic porosity for

365 | P a g e
2 minerals) have been calculated, using the equations in Neutron Porosity Model and
Sonic Porosity Model the crossplot porosity is calculated as follows:

𝛷𝑇𝑁1 − 𝛷𝑇𝑆1
𝛷𝑇 = 𝛷𝑇𝑆1 +
𝛷𝑇 − 𝛷𝑇𝑁2
1 − 𝑁1
𝛷𝑇𝑆1 − 𝛷𝑇𝑆2

𝛷𝐸𝑁1 − 𝛷𝐸𝑆1
𝛷𝐸 = 𝛷𝐸𝑆1 +
𝛷𝐸 − 𝛷𝐸𝑁2
1 − 𝑁1
𝛷𝐸𝑆1 − 𝛷𝐸𝑆2

Where:

𝛷𝑇𝑁1 Neutron corrected total porosity for matrix 1

𝛷𝑇𝑁2 Neutron corrected total porosity for matrix 2

𝛷𝑇𝑆1 Sonic corrected total porosity for matrix 1

𝛷𝑇𝑆2 Sonic corrected total porosity for matrix 2

𝛷𝐸𝑁1 Neutron corrected effective porosity for matrix 1

𝛷𝐸𝑁2 Neutron corrected effective porosity for matrix 2

𝛷𝐸𝑆1 Sonic corrected effective porosity for matrix 1

𝛷𝐸𝑆2 Sonic corrected effective porosity for matrix 2

How to open "Total and Effective Porosity from Neutron-Sonic" form:

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model for clastic module.

2. Press on "Porosity" >Calculate Porosity by "Neutron-Sonic" form is opened.

3. Into "Porosity" form:

366 | P a g e
Settings
 Neutron drop box: The software automatically provides Neutron curve from the
input data or user can choose the appropriate curve.
 Sonic drop box: The software automatically provides Sonic curve from the input
data or user can choose the appropriate curve.
 Clay volume drop box: The software automatically provides clay volume value
from the result of clay volume or user can choose the appropriate curve.
Parameters
 No: the number of zones.
 Name: the software provides the zone name based on the zone name in clay
volume. It will be changed when user changes the zone name in clay volume.
 Top: the starting depth of the zone. It depends on user splits zone in the well depth
in calculation clay volume.
 Bottom: the end of depth of the zone.
 Color: the software provides the color based on zone color in clay volume. This
color will be changed when user changes zone color in calculation clay volume.
 Use check box: allows user to choose the zone which they want to calculate
porosity.
In the Neutron porosity
 Clean: is the value of Neutron Porosity sand with the default value is -0.015. This
value will be changed when users drag and drop the control line on Neutron-Sonic
log track, histogram or overlay line on crossplot.
 Clay: is the value of Neutron Porosity clay with the default value is 0.35. This
value will be changed when users drag and drop the control line on Neutron-Sonic
log track, histogram or overlay line on crossplot.
 Fluid: is the value of Neutron Porosity fluid with the default value is 1.
In the Sonic

367 | P a g e
 Clean: is the value of Sonic of Sand with the default value is 55.5 . This value will
be changed when users drag and drop the control line on Neutron-Sonic log track,
histogram or overlay line on crossplot..
 Clay: is the value of Sonic of clay with the default value is 110. This value will be
changed when users drag and drop the control line on Neutron-Sonic log track,
histogram or overlay line on crossplot.
 Fluid: is the value of Sonic fluid with the default value is 189.

Outputs

 Dataset drop box: allows user to choose the location to save the result.
 Porosity: the software provides the name for total porosity (PHIT_NS) ,effective
porosity (PHIE_NS) and RHOMA. User also changes these names by manually.

 Run button: Allows user to run the porosity calculation.


 Show Logplot button: Allows user to show the plot result.

368 | P a g e
 Manage zones button: Allows user to show zone management.
 Close button: Close the form.

Final Porosity
Introduction

This method calculates the porosity as a combination of different porosities computed


from different methods. The following computed methods are proposed: Arithmetic
mean, Median, Minimum, Maximum.

Input

Name Unit Description


Porosity v/v Calculated porosity
Flag The Flag must be defined by 0 and 1

User has to define in the family/Alias selection window the right number of inputs used
for the computation.

Parameters

Name Unit Description


Porosity Merged Method The proposed methods are: Average, Median, Minimum,
Maximum,

Outputs

Name Unit Description


PHIT_Final v/v Total porosity final
PHIE_Final v/v Effective porosity final

Equations

369 | P a g e
1 1
𝑥=𝑥 ∑𝑛𝑖=1 𝑥𝑖 = 𝑛 (𝑥1 + 𝑥2 … + 𝑥𝑛 )

How to open "Porosity Final" form:

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model for clastic module.

2. Press on 'Porosity' >Calculate 'Porosity final' form is opened.

3. Into ‘Final porosity’ form:

 Methods Statistics

Min Value check box: the minimum value of the total or effective porosity in
interest zone

Max Value check box: the maximum value of the total or effective porosity in
interest zone

Average check box: the average value of the total or effective porosity in interest
zone.

Median check box: the median is the number separating the higher half of a
data sample or a probability distribution, from the lower half.

P10 check box: the value of the total porosity for which there is only a 10%
chance that the true value exceeds the value. Often called the high case.

P50 check box: the value of the total porosity for which there is a 50% chance
that the true value lies either above or below the value.

P90 check box: the value of the total porosity for which there is a 90% chance
that the true value exceeds the value. Often called the low case.

370 | P a g e
Update button: allows user update the results of minimum, maximum, average,
median, P10, P50, P90 on Final Porosity table when user check box on method Statistics.

 Final porosity
 In zone
Name: the software provides the zone name based on the zone name in clay
volume. It will be changed when user change the zone name in clay volume.
In name "+" icon: click "+" icon, the software presents the statistic of individual
method. In this table includes Method, Curve name, min, max, Average, Median,
P10, P50, P90 value.
Top: the starting depth of the zone. It depends on user splits zone in the well depth
in calculation clay volume.
Bottom: the end of depth of the zone.
 In methods

Model drop box: the software provides the methods names which are used to
calculate porosity. User can choose the wish method to calculate porosity. When
user chooses the wishes method, the statistic of this method will be shown in
Min, Max, Average, Median value.

Min, Max, Average, Median column: shows the statistic value of each zone.

 Outputs
Dataset: allows user to choose location to save the final curve.
Final curve: the software provides the final curve name. However user can
change this name manually.

371 | P a g e
Apply button: Apply the chosen method for calculating final clay volume.

Run button: Run the processing.

Close button: Close final clay volume form.

The Hydrocarbon Correction

Introduction

The hydrocarbon correction is an iterative process to correct the neutron and density
readings for the effect of hydrocarbons.

The major steps are:

1. Calculate the porosity

2. Calculate the flushed zone saturation

3. Correct the density and neutron log readings

372 | P a g e
4. Re-calculate the porosity with the new values of density and the neutron.

1. Calculate porosity

2. Pre-computations: Calculate water resistivity and mud filtrate density from salinity
and temperature

Using a salinity value, these two parameters are calculated.

The formula may also be used to compute formation water resistivity and density out of
the formation water salinity.

If the temperature is Celsius degree:

𝑇𝑒𝑚𝑝𝑖𝑛𝑝𝑢𝑡 +21.5
𝑅𝑤𝑡 = 𝑅𝑤 *
𝑇𝑒𝑚𝑝𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑚𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 +21.5

𝑇𝑒𝑚𝑝𝑖𝑛𝑝𝑢𝑡 +21.5
𝑅𝑚𝑓𝑡 = 𝑅𝑚𝑓 *
𝑇𝑒𝑚𝑝𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑚𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 +21.5

If the temperature is Fahrenheit:

𝑇𝑒𝑚𝑝𝑖𝑛𝑝𝑢𝑡 +6.77
𝑅𝑤𝑡 = 𝑅𝑤 *
𝑇𝑒𝑚𝑝𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑚𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 +6.77

𝑇𝑒𝑚𝑝𝑖𝑛𝑝𝑢𝑡 +6.77
𝑅𝑚𝑓𝑡 = 𝑅𝑚𝑓 *
𝑇𝑒𝑚𝑝𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑚𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 +6.77

If Rw or Rmf is the specific curve, this curve will be used to apply to below equation
without converting to formation condition.

(0.73∗𝑆𝑎𝑙𝑖𝑛𝑖𝑡𝑦)
𝜌𝑚𝑓 = 1+
106

3. Calculate the flushed zone saturation (Sxo) using the Archie equation

373 | P a g e
𝑎 ∗ 𝑅𝑚𝑓𝑡 1
𝑆𝑥𝑜 = ( 𝑚
)𝑛
𝑅𝑥𝑜 ∗ 𝛷

In case Rxo is not available, Rt can be used instead, and then Sw is computed from Rt

𝑎 ∗ 𝑅𝑤𝑡 1
𝑆𝑤 = ( )𝑛
𝑅𝑡 ∗ 𝛷 𝑚

And Sxo is estimated from Sw using the invasion factor X (X < 1)

Sxo=(Sw)x

And Sxo is estimated from Sw using the invasion factor X (X < 1)

4. Correcting the neutron and density readings

4.1 Neutron curve

Compute a factor that correct the neutron reading to the presence of HC taking into
consideration the salinity of the mud filtrate and the density of the HC.

Compute the Excavation effect

Where HIg stands for Hydrogen Index for Gas and HIf stands for Hydrogen Index for
fluid.

Correct the neutron porosity:

𝛷𝑁𝑐𝑜𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 = 𝛷𝑁 + 𝛥𝛷𝑁𝑒𝑥

Where:

𝛷𝑁 = (1 − 𝛷)𝐻𝑚𝑎 + 𝛷[𝑆𝑥𝑜 𝐻𝑚𝑓 + (1 − 𝑆𝑥𝑜 )𝐻𝑔 )

Where 𝐻𝑚𝑎 , 𝐻𝑚𝑓 , 𝐻𝑔 are hydrogen index for matrix, filtrate and gas.

374 | P a g e
𝐻𝑚𝑎 = 0 for sand stone, lame stone or dolomite

𝐻𝑚𝑓 =1-Salinity*10^-6

4−2.5𝜌𝑔
𝐻𝑔 = 9 [ ]*𝜌𝑔
16−2.5𝜌𝑔

𝛥𝛷𝑁𝑒𝑥 = 𝐾 (2𝛷2 ∗ 𝑆𝑤ℎ + 0.04𝛷)(1 − 𝑆𝑤ℎ )

With 𝑆𝑤ℎ = 𝑆𝑥𝑜 𝐻𝑚𝑓 + (1 − 𝑆𝑥𝑜 )𝐻𝑔

4.2 Density curve

Compute a factor that correct the density reading to the presence of HC, taking into
consideration the salinity of the mud filtrate and the density of the HC.

Correct the density reading

𝜌𝑏 = (1 − 𝛷)𝜌𝑚𝑎 + 𝛷[𝑆𝑥𝑜 ∗ 𝜌𝑚𝑓 + (1 − 𝑆𝑥𝑜 )𝜌𝑔 ]

Bibliography:

Theory, Measurement, and Interpretation of Well Logs, Bassiouni, SPE Textbook


Series, Vol. 4, (1994)

375 | P a g e
Utilities

Temperature
The Temperature module is used to create a continuous temperature curve, used in the
interpretation modules for converting water resistivity to formation temperatures.

Input

Name Symbol Description


Depth TVDss True vertical depth of the well
Temperature Temp Temperature of the specific depth

Parameter

Name Unit Description


Depth m or ft True vertical depth of the well
0
Temperature C or 0 F Temperature of the specific depth
0
Gradient C/m The gradient temperature

Output

Name Unit Description


Depth reference curve m or ft The reference depth curve
0
Temp C or F The output curve name of the temperature
C or F Unitless The covert between Celsius and Fahrenheit

Equation:

For Use points

Y= ax+b

376 | P a g e
For Use gradient

𝑦
T= ∗𝑎+𝑏
100

Where y: the true vertical depth (TVDss) of the specific well

a: gradient temperature

x: temperature of the specific depth

b: variable

How to open "Temperature" form:

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model for clastic module.

2. Press on "Utilities" > "Temperature" form is opened.

3. Into "Temperature" form:

Parameters:

Temperature scale: the software provides two scales are degree Celsius and degree
Fahrenheit

Use gradient check box: the the software provides temperature calculation form. When
user chooses the "Use gradient" to calculate temperature, the temperature
calculation form will be opened.

 In Use gradient form:

Top: the starting depth of the well which user wants to use to calculate temperature. It
help user identifying the interval depth of the well to calculate temperature more
accuracy.

377 | P a g e
Bottom: the ending depth of the well which user wants to use to calculate temperature. It
help user identifying the interval depth of the well to calculate temperature more
accuracy.

Gradient: the software provides the gradient temperature default is 3 and user can
change this value for specific well by manually.

Reference depth: the software provides the default depth is 0. This mean that is the
depth at platform, User can change this value by manually.

Temperature: the software provides the default temperature is 24. This is the
temperature at platform and user can change this value depending on the individual well.

Use points check box: the software provides temperature calculation form. When user
chooses the "Use points" to calculate temperature, the temperature calculation form
will be opened.

 In Use points form:

Browse button: the software support user adding true vertical depth and temperature by
*.txt or *.csv file.

Paste button: the software support user copy TVDss and temperature data from *.xls and
*.txt file

Delete Row: Allows user to delete row they want.

Clear all: Allows user to delete all parameter on "use points" window.

Top: the starting depth of the well which user wants to use to calculate temperature .It
help user identifying the interval depth of the well to calculate temperature more
accuracy.

378 | P a g e
Bottom: the ending depth of the well which user wants to use to calculate temperature. It
help user identifying the interval depth of the well to calculate temperature more
accuracy.

Depth and Temp column: user can type the data manually.

Dataset drop box: the location to save the output curve name.

Depth reference curve drop box: the reference depth of the well which temperature will
follow to the reference depth (MD, TVD, TVDss)

Curve name drop box: the software provides the curve name and user can change this
name manually.

Run button: Run the temperature calculation.

Apply button: Save the parameter in temperature form.

379 | P a g e
Import button: Load the parameter to temperature form.

Export button: Save the parameter to load these parameters for another interpretation.

Close button: Close the form.

Formation Resistivity
Introduction

This method computes the formation resistivity from a temperature and formation
water salinity

Input

Name Unit Description


Temperature degC Formation temperature
Salinity ppm Water salinity

Output

Name Symbol Unit


Formation resistivity Rw Ohm.m

Equations:

𝑇1 +66.7 0
𝑅2 = 𝑅1 [ ]F
𝑇2 +6.77

𝑇1 +21.5 0
𝑅2 = 𝑅1 [ ]C
𝑇2 +21.5

380 | P a g e
How to open "Formation resistivity" form:

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model for clastic module.

381 | P a g e
2. Press on "Data processing" > Click on "Formation resistivity" > "Formation
resistivity" form is opened.

3. Into "Formation resistivity" form:

Input

Well drop box: allows the user chooses the active well to calculate Rw.

Temperature drop box: the software provides the Temperature curve or user can choose
the wish curve. Furthermore the software identifies the kind of temperature unit to
provide the appropriate equation to calculate Rw.

Zone set drop box: the software provides 2 zones including Clay volume and Porosity
zone, Saturation zone. User can choose the wishes zone to apply to formation resistivity.
Parameters

Name: the software provides the zone name according to the name in zone set. It will be
changed when user changes the zone name of choosing zone set.
Top: the starting depth of the well which user wants to use to calculate temperature.
Bottom: the ending depth of the well which user wants to use to calculate temperature.
Salinity: User can type the value of salinity. This value gets form the laboratory.
Output
Dataset drop box: the location to save the output curve name.
Curve name drop box: the software provides the curve name and user can change this
name manually.

382 | P a g e
Run button: Run the process

Apply button: Save the parameters in salinity form

Close button: Close the form

Multi Mineral Solver


Interval setting

- Top (m), Bottom (m): allows user to define the depth interval that you wish to
interpret. The default values are the start depth and top depth of the well.

- Get Well Depth button is used to set the default value of starting and ending well
depth for top depth and bottom depth.

Zone Management

383 | P a g e
Zone management is designed to manage all zones of all wells. The zone management
can handle both manage all existed zone and create new zones in multi mineral solver
model.

How to open Zone Management form:

1. Open multi mineral solver model.

2. Press on 'Zone manager' > 'Zone management' form is opened.

3. Into Zone management form:

- Parameter: this is default option and will display all interpretation models
of selected well.

- User defined: this option gives users an option adding and managing zones
for user define folder in data tree. Easy to switch between parameter and
user defined by tick on/off.

Parameters

- Parameter Name: displays all existed interpretation of selected well. User can
select the parameter you want by selecting from drop down menu. If you want to
edit name of Parameter, pressing Edit, the Edit Parameter form pops up to you
type the new name.

- Zone Set: displays 2 default zone sets of selected parameter, they are mineral
zone, fluid zone. You select the zone you want to set from drop down menu.

- Zones table: displays the existed zones of selected zone set. The default zone is
Mineral zone.

Into zones table:

384 | P a g e
Name column: displays the name of zone. You are easy to input the name
of zone by manually typing text.

Top Depth (m): displays the start depth of zone. You are easy to define
start depth of zone by typing number.

Bottom Depth (m): displays the bottom depth of zone. You are easy to
define bottom depth of zone by typing number.

Line Color: is the color of border of zone.

Text Color: is the color of zone name.

Background Color: is the color of background of zone.

Add Row: allows user to add new zone into zone set. New zone is added
in the Above or Below of zone table by default. Well-Sight doesn't allow
adding overlap zones.

Delete Row: allows user to delete the selected zone. You can delete
multiple zones by press and keep Ctrl.

User defined: the working of user defined is same as Parameter. But User defined
displays all zone sets under 'User Defined' folder in data tree.

Define Input & Output

The input curve is designed to you choose the input curves to interpret. Up to 8 curves
can be used.

How to open 'Input Curve' form:

1. Open multi mineral solver model.

2. Press on "define Input & Output" > "Input Curve" form is opened.

3. Into Input Curve form:

385 | P a g e
- Curve type: displays 8 curve types: PE, URAN, THOR, POTA, RHOB,
NPHI, DT, GR. If you want to select curve types to join the system of
equations, you highlight on curve type and press forward arrow.

- The 'forward arrow' and 'backward arrow' are used to select and un-
select curve type to input parameter.

- Input Parameters table:

Curve type column: displayed the selected curves.

Curve Name: allows you to select curve name corresponding with


curve type.

Weight: each curve will be assigned a weight value (0 ~ 1). The


bigger the weight value, the more the curve will affect the result.

Import/Export button: are designed to import/export to external


file. (Refer Import/Export chapter).

Output curves

Default save data: The software support incon "+" to create new dataset for the results

Synthetic suffix: Allows users to type the suffix name of Synthtic curve

Volumne mineral suffix: Allows user to type the suffix name of the mineral volume
curve.

Input Mineral Model


The Mineral Model form is designed to build mineral model for each zone sections.
Mineral Model form allows you set up the log respond parameters fluid and minerals.
How to open Mineral Model form:
1. Open multi mineral solver model.
2. Press on "Input Mineral Model" > "Mineral Model" form is opened.

386 | P a g e
3. Into Mineral Model form:
- Model: Allows users to build mineral model , user can build a great devisity of
models which based on the condition they set up.

Build Parameter

Build mineral parameter form provides utility tool to build log respond parameters for
each mineral base on the volume of each minerals and the average curves value.

Into "Build Parameter" form:

- Mineral: select mineral from drop down list.


- Use: tick on ‘Use’ when you want to select the minerals.
- Volume: you have to input the volume of mineral by manually typing. Total
volume of minerals and fluid must be equal 1.
- Curve Value: Allows user to input the value of selected curves by manually
typing. WELL INSIGHT supports 8 curve families. They are

Density family: RHOB

Neutron porosity family: NPHI

Sonic family: DT

Gamma ray family: GR

PAI

URAN

Thori family: THORY

Potassium family: POTA

- Tick on ‘Use’ checkbox to select curve.

387 | P a g e
- You have to input Min and Max value of each log value for each mineral. If not
WELL INSIGHT supports loading the existed file by pressing “Load” button. The
existed file is loaded then you can edit to change the data.
- Press “Run” button > WELL INSIGHT calculate the log respond values for each
minerals.
- All mineral models are displayed in Model table to you select the zone is exported.
You can select one or multiple model.
- WELL INSIGHT supports 4 options to export data to models. Select option from
drop down list menu:

Replace: Replace all existed mineral parameters in Input Mineral Model form
and add new minerals from build mineral parameters.

Add differences: just add the different minerals and keep the existed mineral in
input mineral model form.

Replace the existing: Just replace the existed mineral (similar minerals) in input
mineral model form.

Replace existing and add different: Replace identical minerals between Build
Mineral parameter and Input Mineral Model and add the different minerals
between 2 forms.

1. Press ‘Export to model’ to execute the job.

- Mineral Zones: displays all zones that you define for mineral zones. Each zones
may has different mineral components and parameters.
- Mineral Type: is the mineral library which has all mineral names.
- Forward arrow: using to select mineral from Mineral Type to Parameters.
- Backward arrow: using to move mineral from Parameters table to Mineral Type.
- Parameters: allows user to set new model for each zone

388 | P a g e
- Select model: Allows user to select the default model for each zone. The software
supports 3 models including sand, shale and carbonate model.
- Fix curve: allows users utilize the mineral volume curve if user know the volume
of specific mineral.
Condition: Allows user to identify the model which they want to apply for their zone.
Clay Minerals Volume
The Clay Minerals Volume form is designed to build clay minerals from the available
mineral which is gotten from input mineral for each zone sections.
How to open Clay Minerals Volume form:
1. Open multi mineral solver model.
2. Press on ' Clay Minerals Volume' > 'Clay Minerals Volume' form is opened.
3. Into Clay Minerals Volume form:
- Available mineral: Including all mineral from input mineral form of each zone
- Ratio: Allows user to set up the percentage of each mineral which attend in clay
volume.

Multi – Minerals Solver

Multi – Minerals Solver method helps to calculate porosity, mineral volumes and
theoretically synthetic curves from a number of ‘input curves’, mineral parameters.

How to open Calculate Minerals & Total Porosity:

1. Open multi mineral solver model.

2. Press on 'Multi – Minerals Solver' > 'Calculate Minerals & Total Porosity' form is
opened.

3. Into ‘Calculate Minerals & Total Porosity’ form:

- Interval: the interval depth was set up in define interpretation interval is


displayed as default. User can edit the interval by manually typing.

389 | P a g e
- Skip Points: The default value is 2. User can change by manually typing. If
the skip point is 2 means that WELL INSIGHT will calculate for one point
and keep this value for next point.

- Reset All Curves Value: ‘tick on’ is default setting. If user check it, the
WELL INSIGHT will update the value of output curve by new settings.

- Suffix of Synthetic curves: allow user choose the suffix of output curve by
manually typing.

- Save Data in: allows user choose the folder to save all the output curves.

4. Press ‘Run’ to execute the job.

Correction for the mineralogical composition

A presence of different minerals in the rocks depends on their volumetric content that
makes a big influence on physical characteristics. Therefore, in the determination of
porosity, it is very important to evaluate the influence of every main mineral on physical
characteristics.

The mineral distribution in the Bach Ho oil field basement rocks

The algorithm for calculating porosity corrected by the mineral composition.

The following system linear equations are used to find out the porosity and mineral
volumes. Up to 8 equations can be used. But in the normal case: the number of equation
usually less than 8, and the number of unknown may be not equal the number of
equations. To solve the equations, the least-square error is used.

δb=Φδmf+ΣδmiVmi
ΦN=ΦWmf+ΣWmiVmi
ΔT=ΦΔTmi+ΣΔTmiVmi

390 | P a g e
U=ΦUmf+ΣUmiVmi
GR=ΣGRmiVmi
TH=ΣTHmiVmi
UR=ΣURmiVmi
PO= ΣPOmiVmi

 Where δb, δmf, δmi and Vmi are respectively the bulk density, mud-filtrate
density, i-mineral density and its volumetric proportion

 ΦN, W, DT, GR, TH, UR, PO and U are respectively the neutron porosity,
hydro, travel time, gamma ray value, thori, uran, potassium content and an
electron absorption section.

391 | P a g e
Thin Bed Analysis
Introduction

Using the Thomas-Stieber method for shale (clay) distribution, Well-InsightTM can now
output the volumes of Laminated and Dispersed shale in the reservoir. The method is
based on Juhasz SPWLA paper “Assessment of the distribution of shale, porosity and
hydrocarbon saturation in shaley sands”. The applied method within Well-InsightTM are
the same as in the Thomas –Stieber paper where Vclay-PHIT crossplot is used to define
Laminated and Disperse Clay Volume.

The workflow for Thin Bed Analysis (TBA) in Well-InsightTM includes:

1. Define Laminar Clay Volume, Disperse Clay Volume and Sand Porosity
2. Define Sand Resistivity if Horizontal Resistivity and Vertical Resistivity available
(optional)
3. Define Total Water Saturation

392 | P a g e
Setting Tab Thomas – Stieber

User can either input values of Clay Volume and Porosity calculated through any
Interpretation method (Gamma Ray, Neutron or Neutron-Density, etc.) or use available
VCL and PHIT curves to calculate Laminar Clay Volume, Dispersed Clay Volume, Total
Sand Porosity and Effective Sand Porosity.

Parameters such as Shale Porosity, Maximum Sand Porosity can be input on form or
defined by end-points on Vclay-PHIT crossplot

Header:

 Zoneset: Select zoneset for calculation


 Clay Volume: Select input curve for Clay Volume
 Total Porosity: Select input curve for Total Porosity

393 | P a g e
 Water Saturation Method: Select method for Water Saturation. There are 3
methods: Include Archie, Dual - Water and Waxman – Smit

Variable Inputs:

 No: the number of zones


 Zone: all zones in selected Zoneset will be listed down, including Name, Top,
Bottom and Color
 Settings: user check Use button to do the calculation for these zones

Parameters:

Name Symbol Unit Description Default


value
Shale Porosity shale v/v Total Shale Porosity 0.4
Sand Porosity sand-max v/v Total Sand Porosity Max 0.35
Max

The Crossplot window can be opened by clicking on Show Crossplot button (show the
relation between Clay volume and Total Porosity) in Settings tab. On this crossplot, the
user can adjust "Sand max porosity" and "Shale porosity" control points to let the
program re-calculate volumetric of laminated and dispersed shale. Also, the parameters
on "Thin Bed analysis" form would be interactively updated.

394 | P a g e
Calculation Equations:

T − sd − max + 𝑉𝑐𝑙 ∗ (1 − clay)


𝑉𝐶𝐿_𝐿𝑎𝑚
1 − sandmax

𝑉𝐶𝐿_𝐷𝑖𝑠𝑝 = 𝑉𝐶𝐿 − 𝑉𝐶𝐿_𝐿𝑎𝑚

T − Vcl_lam ∗ clay
Φ 𝑇_𝑠𝑎𝑛𝑑
1 − Vcl_lam

T − Vcl ∗ clay
Φ𝐸_𝑠𝑎𝑛𝑑 =
1 − Vcl_lam

395 | P a g e
Setting Tab 3D Inversion

Whenever Horizontal and Vertical Resistivity data is available, the user has the ability to
utilize 3D Inversion form to calculate Sand Resistivity following the subsequence
workflow:

Header:

 No: the number of zones


 Zoneset: Select zoneset for calculation
 Clay Volume: Select input curve for Clay Volume
 Total Porosity: Select input curve for Total Porosity
 Rh: Select input curve for Horizontal Resistivity
 Rv: Select input curve for Vertical Resistivity

396 | P a g e
 Water Saturation Method: Select method for Water Saturation. There are 3
methods: Include Archie, Dual - Water and Waxman – Smit

Variable Inputs:

 Zone: all zones in selected Zoneset will be listed down, including Name, Top,
Bottom and Color
 Settings: user check Use button to do the calculation for these zones

Equation Parameters

Name Symbol Unit Description Default


value
Shale Porosity shale v/v Total Shale Porosity 0.4
Shale Horizontal Rsh_h Ohm.m Shale Horizontal 2.5
Resistivity Resistivity
Shale Vertical Rsh_v Ohm.m Shale Resistivity 4
Resistivity

Calculation Equations

397 | P a g e
Water Saturation

After calculating Laminar Clay Volume, Disperse Clay Volume, Total Sand Porosity and
Effective Sand Porosity, the next step is to calculate the Total Water Saturation.

When 3D Inversion data is available, the user can calculate Sand Resistivity by using the
above formulas. In case this data is missing, Laminar Shale Volume is estimated first.
After that we apply formulas to calculate sand resistivity with an assumption that
formation resistivity is equal to horizontal resistivity.

The TBA workflow supports 3 calculation methods: Archie model, Dual Water model
and Waxman – Smits model.

Header:

 Sand Formation Resistivity: Select input curve for Sand Formation Resistivity
 Temperature: Select input curve for Temperature

398 | P a g e
Variable Inputs:

 No: the number of zones


 Zone: all zones in selected Zoneset will be listed down, including Name, Top,
Bottom and Color
 Settings: user check Use button to do the calculation for these zones

Equation Parameters:

Name Symbol Unit Description Default value


Tortuosity a unitless Tortuosity factor 1
factor
Cementation m unitless Cementation exponent 2
exponent Available if the cementation
exponent input variable is missing
Saturation n unitless Saturation exponent 2
exponent Available if the cementation
exponent input variable is missing
Rw Rw Ohm.m Formation water resistivity 0.03
o
Temperature Temp C / oF Temperature 60
Rsh Rsh Ohm.m Resistivity log reading in 100% 4.5
clay?????

Calculation Equations:

Archie:

n
a Rw
Sw = ∗
𝛷 m Rt

399 | P a g e
Dual – Water:

𝑎 1 1 1 (𝑛−1)
𝑚 = ∗ 𝑆𝑤𝑛 + 𝑄𝑣 ∗ ( 2 − ) ∗ 𝑆𝑤
𝑅𝑡 ∗ 𝛷𝑡 𝑅𝑤 𝛷𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 ∗ 𝑅𝑠ℎ 𝑅𝑤

𝛷𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 ∗ 𝑉𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦
𝑄𝑣 =
𝛷𝑡

Waxman – Smits:

𝑅𝑤
𝑅𝑡 =
∗ ∗ 𝑄𝑣
𝑠𝑤𝑛 𝛷 𝑚 (1 + 𝑅𝑤 𝐵 )
𝑆𝑤

−1.28 + 0.225 ∗ 𝑇𝑒𝑚𝑝 − 0.0004059 ∗ 𝑇𝑒𝑚𝑝2


𝐵= 1.23
1 + (0.04 ∗ 𝑇𝑒𝑚𝑝 − 0.27) ∗ 𝑅𝑤

Laminar Sand Dispersed Bound Water Saturation (Thomas – Haley,1977):

 tsand −  esand
Swb_disp =
 tsand

In the absence of core data Qv can be estimated using the Hill, Shirley, & Klein
equation:

Swb_disp
Qv = 0.6425
+0.22
√NaCl (kppm)

If you have significant antigenic clays, better measure some’s CEC’s. User can calculate
Qv follow equation:

CEC∗(1− Tsand)∗  matrix sand


Qv =
100∗ Tsand

Typical Properties of Clay:


400 | P a g e
Clay CEC Grain Density Hydrocarbon
(meq/100g) (g/cc) Index
Kaolinite 3-15 2.64 0.37
Illinite 10-40 2.77 0.09
Montmorillonite 80-150 2.62 0.12
Chlorite 1-30 3 0.32

401 | P a g e
OutPut Curve

Name Symbol Unit


Laminar Clay Volume VCL_lam_TS v/v
Disperse Clay Volume VCL_disp_TS v/v
Total Sand Porosity PhiT_sand_TS v/v
Effective Sand Porosity PhiE_sand_TS v/v
Total Water Saturation Sw_TS v/v
Sand Resistivity (optional) R_sand Ohm.m
Bulk Volume Water Bvw_TS v/v
Apparent Water Resistivity Rwapp_TS

402 | P a g e
Qv (only Waxman – Smit model chosen) Qv_TS Meq/cc
Bound Water Saturation (only Dual – Water Swb_TS v/v
model chosen)

 Dataset: select the dataset to save output curves


 Apply: save settings
 Run: perform calculation
 Close: Close form

403 | P a g e
Log Plot Result

In the log plot result, the Rw and Rsh bar can be manually adjusted directly on the plot
and the values of Rw and Rsh in Water Saturation tab will automatically change.

404 | P a g e
Water Saturation

Archie
Introduction

This method computes the formation water saturation using the Archie equation

Variable Inputs

Name Symbol Unit Description


Formation Resistivity Rt Ohm.m Formation resistivity
Porosity v/v Calculated porosity
Turtuosity factor a unitless a constant (often taken to be 1)
Cementation exponent m unitless cementation factor (varies around 2)
Saturation exponent n unitless saturation exponent (generally 2)
Formation Water Resistivity Rw Ohm.m Formation water resistivity in the
zone of interest

Equation Parameters

Name Symbol Unit Description Default value

Turtuosity a unitless Turtuosity factor 1


factor
Cementation m unitless Cementation exponent 2
exponent Available if the cementation exponent
input variable is missing
Saturation n unitless Saturation exponent 2
exponent Available if the cementation exponent
input variable is missing
Rw Rw Ohm.m Formation water resistivity 0.03

Variable output

405 | P a g e
Name Symbol Unit
Water saturation Archie Sw_Ar v/v

Invaded water saturation Archie Sxo_Ar v/v

Bulk volume water Archie Bvw_Ar v/v


Invaded Bulk volume water Archie BvwSxo_Ar v/v

Equations

Name Symbol Unit Description

𝑛
𝑎𝑅𝑚𝑓
𝑆𝑥𝑜 =
𝛷 𝑚 ∗ 𝑅𝑥𝑜

n
a Rw
Sw = ∗
𝛷m Rt

Simandoux
Introduction

This method computes the formation water saturation using the Simandoux equation.

Inputs

406 | P a g e
Formation Resistivity Rt Ohm.m RT log reading in zone of interest
Effective Porosity 𝜱e v/v Calculated effective porosity
Clay volume Vclay v/v Calculated Shale volume
Tortuosity Factor a Unitless Tortuosity factor in zone of interest
Cementation Exponent m Unitless Cementation exponent in zone of interest
Saturation Exponent n Unitless Cementation exponent in zone of interest
Formation Water Resistivity Rw Ohm.m Rw value in zone of interest

Parameters

Symbol Unit Description Default value


a Unitless Tortuosity exponent 1
m Unitless Cementation exponent 2
n Unitless Saturation exponent 2
Rw Ohm.m Rw value 0.03
Rcl Ohm.m Resistivity log reading in 100% clay 4.5

Outputs

Name Unit Description


Sw_Sim v/v Saturation Simandoux
Sxo_Sim v/v Invaded Water Saturation Simandoux
Bvw_Sim v/v Bulk volume water Simandoux
BvwSxo_Sim v/v Invaded Bulk volume water Simandoux

Equations

1 𝛷𝑚 ∗ 𝑆𝑤𝑛 𝑉𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 ∗ 𝑆𝑤
= +
𝑅𝑡 𝑎 ∗ 𝑅𝑤 𝑅𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦

407 | P a g e
Dual Water
Introduction

This method computes the formation water saturation using the DualWater equation.

Variable inputs

Name Symbol Unit Description


Formation Resistivity Rt Ohm.m Formation resistivity
Micro resistivity Rxo Ohm.m Flushed zone resistivity
Total Porosity 𝜱t v/v Computed total porosity
Clay Volume Vclay v/v Computed shale volume
Tortuosity factor a Unitless Tortuosity factor in the zone of interest
Cementation exponent m Unitless Cementation exponent in the zone of interest
Saturation exponent n Unitless Saturation exponent in the zone of interest
Formation Water Rw Ohm.m Formation water resistivity in the zone of
Resistivity interest
Resistivity Mud filtrate Rmf Ohm.m Mud filtrate resistivity

Equation parameters

Name Symbol Unit Description Default


value
Tortuosity factor a Unitless Tortuosity factor in the zone of interest 1
Cementation m Unitless Cementation exponent in the zone of 2
exponent interest
Saturation exponent n Unitless Saturation exponent in the zone of interest 2
Formation Water Rw Ohm.m Formation water resistivity in the zone of 0.03
Resistivity interest
Mud filtrate Rmf Ohm.m Mud filtrate resistivity. Available if the 0.125
Resistivity Mud filtrate Resistivity input variable is
missing.
Clay resistivity Rclay Ohm.m Resistivity value reading in 100% clay 4.5

408 | P a g e
Porosity clay 𝜱tclay v/v Porosity value reading in 100% clay 0.35

Variable outputs

Name Unit Description


Sw_Dua v/v Saturation DuaWater
Sxo_Dua v/v Invaded Water Saturation DuaWater
Bvw_Dua v/v Bulk volume water DuaWater
BvwSxo_Dua v/v Invaded Bulk volume water DuaWater

Equations

𝑎 1 1 1 (𝑛−1)
𝑚 = ∗ 𝑆𝑤𝑛 + 𝑄𝑣 ∗ ( 2 − ) ∗ 𝑆𝑤
𝑅𝑡 ∗ 𝛷𝑡 𝑅𝑤 𝛷𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 ∗ 𝑅𝑠ℎ 𝑅𝑤

𝑎 1 𝑛
1 1 (𝑛−1)
𝑚 = ∗ 𝑆𝑥𝑜 + 𝑄𝑣 ∗ ( 2 − ) ∗ 𝑆𝑥𝑜
𝑅𝑥𝑜 ∗ 𝛷𝑡 𝑅𝑚𝑓 𝛷𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 ∗ 𝑅𝑠ℎ 𝑅𝑚𝑓

𝛷𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 ∗ 𝑉𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦
𝑄𝑣 =
𝛷𝑡

Juhasz
Introduction

This method computes the formation water saturation using the Juhasz equation.

Variable inputs

Name Symbol Unit Description


Formation Resistivity Rt Ohm.m Formation resistivity
Total Porosity 𝜱t v/v Calculated total porosity
Shale volume Vclay v/v Calculated clay volume
Cementation exponent m* Unitless Cementation exponent in zone of interest

409 | P a g e
Saturation exponent n* Unitless Saturation exponent in zone of interest
Formation Water Resistivity Rw Ohm.m Formation water resistivity

Equation parameters

Name Symbol Unit Description Default


value
Cementation exponent m* Unitless Cementation exponent in the zone 2
of interest
Saturation exponent n* Unitless Saturation exponent in the zone of 2
interest
Formation Water Resistivity Rw Ohm.m Formation water resistivity in the 0.03
zone of interest
Clay resistivity Rclay Ohm.m Resistivity value reading in 4.5
100% clay
Porosity clay 𝜱tclay v/v Porosity value reading in 100% 0.35
clay

Variable outputs

Name Unit Description


Sw_Juh v/v Saturation Juhasz
Sxo_Juh v/v Invaded Water Saturation Juhasz
Bvw_Juh v/v Bulk volume water Juhasz
BvwSxo_Juh v/v Invaded Bulk volume water Juhasz

Equations

1 1 𝑛∗ 1 1 (𝑛∗ −1)
= 𝑆 + 𝑄𝑣𝑛 ( 𝑚∗ − ) ∗ 𝑆𝑤
𝑅𝑤 𝑤

𝑅𝑡 𝛷𝑡𝑚 𝛷𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 ∗ 𝑅𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 𝑅𝑤

410 | P a g e
𝛷𝑡𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 ∗ 𝑉𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦
𝑄𝑣𝑛 =
𝛷𝑡

Indonesia
Introduction

This method computes the formation water saturation using the Indonesia equation.

Inputs

Name Symbol Unit Description


Formation Resistivity Rt Ohm.m RT log reading in zone of interest
Effective Porosity 𝜱e v/v Calculated effective porosity
Clay volume Vclay v/v Calculated Shale volume
Tortuosity Factor a Unitless Tortuosity factor in zone of interest
Cementation Exponent m Unitless Cementation exponent in zone of interest
Saturation Exponent n Unitless Cementation exponent in zone of interest
Formation Water Resistivity Rw Ohm.m Rw value in zone of interest

Parameters

Symbol Unit Description Default value


a Unitless Tortuosity exponent 1
m Unitless Cementation exponent 2
n Unitless Saturation exponent 2
Rw Ohm.m Rw value 0.03
Rcl Ohm.m Resistivity log reading in 100% clay 4.5

Outputs

Name Unit Description


Sw_Ind v/v Saturation Indonesia

411 | P a g e
Sxo_Ind v/v Invaded Water Saturation Indonesia
Bvw_Ind v/v Bulk volume water Indonesia
BvwSxo_Ind v/v Invaded Bulk volume water Indonesia

Equations

𝑉
(1−( 𝑐𝑙 ))
2
1 𝛷𝑚 𝑉𝑐𝑙 𝑛/2
= (√ + ) ∗ 𝑆𝑤
√𝑅𝑡 𝑎 ∗ 𝑅𝑤 √𝑅𝑐𝑙

Waxman-Smits
Introduction

This method computes the formation water saturation using the Waxman-Smits equation.

Variable inputs

Name Symbol Unit Description


Formation Resistivity Rt Ohm.m Formation resistivity
Volumetric CEC Qv Eq/L Cation exchange capacity per unit pore volume
Porosity 𝜱 v/v Calculated total porosity
Cementation Exponent star m* Unitless Waxman-Smits Cementation Exponent
Saturation exponent star n* Unitless Waxman-Smits Saturation Exponent
Formation Water Resistivity Rw Ohm.m Formation water resistivity
Formation Temperature Temp degC Formation temperature
Waxman B B L.S/eq.m Equivalent cationic conductance of a sodium ion

Equation parameter

Symbol Unit Description Default value


m* Unitless Waxman-Smits Cementation exponent. 2
n* Unitless Waxman-Smits Saturation exponent. 2
Rw Ohm.m Formation water resistivity 0.03

412 | P a g e
B L.S/eq.m Equivalent Cationic Conductance of a Sodium Ion
Temperature degC Formation temperature 60

Variable outputs

Name Unit Description


Sw_Wax v/v Saturation Waxman-Smits
Sxo_Wax v/v Invanded Water Saturation Waxman-Smits
Bvw_Wax v/v Bulk volume water Waxman-Smits
BvwSxo_Wax v/v Invaded Bulk volume water Waxman-Smits

Equations

𝑅𝑤
𝑅𝑡 =
∗ ∗ 𝑄
𝑠𝑤𝑛 𝜑𝑚 (1 + 𝑅𝑤 𝐵 𝑆 𝑣 )
𝑤

−1.28 + 0.225 ∗ 𝑇𝑒𝑚𝑝 − 0.0004059 ∗ 𝑇𝑒𝑚𝑝2


𝐵= 1.23
1 + (0.04 ∗ 𝑇𝑒𝑚𝑝 − 0.27) ∗ 𝑅𝑤

Typical Properties of Clay

Clay CEC Grain Density Hydrocarbon


(meq/100g) (g/cc) Index
Kaolinite 3-15 2.64 0.37
Illinite 10-40 2.77 0.09
Montmorillonite 80-150 2.62 0.12
Chlorite 1-30 3 0.32

Modified Indonesia
Introduction

413 | P a g e
This method computes the formation water saturation using the Modified Indonesia
equation.

Inputs

Name Symbol Unit Description


Formation Resistivity Rt Ohm.m RT log reading in zone of interest
Effective Porosity 𝜱e v/v Calculated effective porosity
Clay volume Vclay v/v Calculated Shale volume
Tortuosity Factor a Unitless Tortuosity factor in zone of interest
Cementation Exponent m Unitless Cementation exponent in zone of
interest
Saturation Exponent n Unitless Cementation exponent in zone of
interest
Formation Water Resistivity Rw Ohm.m Rw value in zone of interest

Parameters

Symbol Unit Description Default value


a Unitless Tortuosity exponent 1
m Unitless Cementation exponent 2
n Unitless Saturation exponent 2
Rw Ohm.m Rw value 0.03
Rcl Ohm.m Resistivity log reading in 100% clay 4.5

Outputs

Name Unit Description


Sw_Imo v/v Saturation Modified Indonesia
Sxo_Imo v/v Invaded Water Saturation Modified Indonesia
Bvw_Imo v/v Bulk volume water Modified Indonesia

414 | P a g e
BvwSxo_Imo v/v Invaded Bulk volume water Modified Indonesia
Name Symbol Unit Description

Equations

((1−𝑉 )/2)
1 𝛷𝑚 𝑉𝑐𝑙 𝑐𝑙
𝑛/2
= (√ + ) ∗ 𝑆𝑤
√𝑅𝑡 𝑎 ∗ 𝑅𝑤 √𝑅𝑐𝑙

Modified Simandoux
Introduction

This method computes the formation water saturation using the Modified Simandoux
equation.

Inputs

415 | P a g e
Formation Resistivity Rt Ohm.m RT log reading in zone of interest
Effective Porosity 𝜱e v/v Calculated effective porosity
Clay volume Vclay v/v Calculated Shale volume
Tortuosity Factor a Unitless Tortuosity factor in zone of interest
Cementation Exponent m Unitless Cementation exponent in zone of interest
Saturation Exponent n Unitless Cementation exponent in zone of interest
Formation Water Resistivity Rw Ohm.m Rw value in zone of interest

Parameters

Symbol Unit Description Default value


a Unitless Tortuosity exponent 1
m Unitless Cementation exponent 2
n Unitless Saturation exponent 2
Rw Ohm.m Rw value 0.03
Rcl Ohm.m Resistivity log reading in 100% clay 4.5

Outputs

Name Unit Description


Sw_Sim v/v Saturation Modified Simandoux
Sxo_Sim v/v Invaded Water Saturation Modified Simandoux
Bvw_Sim v/v Bulk volume water Modified Simandoux
BvwSxo_Sim v/v Invaded Bulk volume water Modified Simandoux

Equations

1 𝛷𝑚 ∗ 𝑆𝑤𝑛 𝑉𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 ∗ 𝑆𝑤
= +
𝑅𝑡 𝑎 ∗ 𝑅𝑤 ∗ (1 − 𝑉𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦 ) 𝑅𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑦

416 | P a g e
How to open "Water Saturation” form:

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model for clastic module

2. Press on "Water Saturation" > "Calculate Water Saturation" form is opened.

3. Into "Water Saturation" form :

Input
 Formation Resistivity drop box: the software provides formation resistivity or
the user can choose the formation resistivity curve from the input data.
 Effective Porosity drop box: the software provides the effective porosity results
from porosity calculation.
 Total Porosity drop box: the software provides the total porosity results from
porosity calculation.
 Shale Volume drop box: the software provides calculated clay volume or user
can choose the appropriate curve.
 Invaded Resistivity check box: User can use Invaded resistivity to calculate Sxo
and BvwSxo, the software provides Invaded Resistivity from the input data or user
can choose this curve. When user check on, Output will show Invaded Water
saturation and invaded Bulk volume curve
 Temperature drop box: the software provides Temperature curve or user can
choose appropriate curve.
Saturation Equation
 The software provides 8 equations to calculate water saturation such as: Achie,
Simandoux, DualWater, Juhasz, ModifiedSimandoux, Indonesia, WaxManSmits,
ModifiedIndonesia.
 Saturation check box: allows user to choose the equation which user wants to use
in order to calculate water saturation.

417 | P a g e
Parameters
 No: the number of zone
 In Zone
 Name: the software provides the zone name based on the zone name in clay
volume. It will be changed when user change the zone name in clay volume.
 Top: the starting depth of the zone. It depends on user splits zone in the well depth
in clay volume calculation.
 Bottom: the end of depth of the zone.
 Color: the software provides the color based on zone color in clay volume. This
color will be changed when user change zone color in calculation clay volume.
 In Gamma

 Use check box: allows user to choose the zone which they want to calculate water
saturation.
 a: the software provides the default value is 1. However user also change this
number manually.
 m: the software provides the default value is 2. However user also change this
number manually.
 n: the software provides the default value is 2. However user also change this
number manually.
 Note: a, m, n: is also called electrical properties get from SCAL (Special core
analysis). The user can get these parameters from laboratory.
 Rw: the software provides water resistivity with the default value is 0.03 and user
can change this number to be suitable with specific field, Rw will change when
user drags and drops Rw control line on Salinity log track. Rw can be a specific

418 | P a g e
number or curve. If Rw is a curve so temperature will be a curve. The software
will support to calculate the Rwt at formation temperature based on this equation:
T1 +21.5
𝑅𝑤𝑡 = R w ∗
T2 +21.5

Where T1 is parameter temperature

T2 is formation temperature of the specific zone

 Temperature: the software provides the specific temperature or user can choose
the temperature curve.
 Rmf: the software provides the mud filtrate resistivity with the default value is
0.125 and user also can change it manually. The software will support to calculate
the Rwt at formation temperature based on this equation:
T1 +21.5
𝑅𝑚𝑓𝑡 = R mf ∗
T2 +21.5

Where T1 is parameter temperature.

T2 is formation temperature of the formation temperature.

 R_sh: the software provides the clay resistivity with the default value is 4.5. User
also change this number manually. It can be changed when user drags and drops
R_sh control line on Resistivity log track.
 PHIT_sh: the software provides the clay porosity with the default value is 0.35.
User also change this number manually.
 m*: Cementation exponent star with the default value is 2 and user can change
this number manually.
 n*: Saturation exponent star with the default value is 2 and user can change this
number manually.
 Note: m*,n* user get these value from Special core analysis in laboratory.

419 | P a g e
 Qv: Volumetric CEC (Cation exchange capacity per unit pore volume).

Output

 Dataset: allows user choose the location to save the output data.
 Rw Apparent drop box: the software provides the Water resistivity apparent
curve name and user can change this name manually.
 Rmf Apparent drop box: the software provides the Mud filtrate resistivity
apparent curve name and user can change this name manually.
 In Curve name
 Name: the equations name are chosen to apply to calculate water saturation.
 Select check box: check on to show Bulk volume Water the result curve name.
Only chosen method will appear on log track.
 Water saturation: the software provides the water saturation results curve name
for each equation. User can change this name manually.
 Bulk volume water: that is the result after calculating according to this equation:
Bvw=Phie*Sw
Where Sw is the result of specific method

420 | P a g e
 Run button: Run database for using zone.
 Show plot button: allows user to observe the Sw curve after interpretation and
compare this curve with others methods.
 Show crossplot button: allows user to make crossplot.
 Show histogram button: allows user to make Histogram of the results.
 Manage Zone button: Click Zone manger to show zone management.
 Close button: Close the interpretation form.

421 | P a g e
Cutoff and Summation

Cutoff and Summation Report


The Cut-offs and Summation window is used primarily to set up the curves to be used,
the curve cut-off values to be applied, any additional Reports that the user wishes to
generate and any output curves to be created.

NOTE: after the first time that the Run button is pressed, any changes to the cut-off
parameter values must be made on the Cut-off and Summation Parameters tab or on
the interactive log plot.

How to open Cutoff and Summation Report Dialog

1. Open workflow task pane for specific interpretation model for clastic module.

2. Press on "Cutoffs and Summation" > "Cutoffs and Summation" form is opened.

3. Into "Cutoffs and Summation" form:

The Cutoffs and Summation Dialog is organized on 3 tabbed screens. These are Input ,
Parameters and Summation Reports.

Zone set check box: Allows user chooses the zone to cutoff and make summation report.

The Reference depth check box: MD, TVDSS Depth allows the user to calculate MD,
and TVDSS Net and Pay thicknesses. The user selects the name of the MD or TVDSS
curve for the well.

Input Tab

Up to 10 input curves can be entered into this screen for using in the summation
computation. The first three curves are pre-defined as 1. Clay volume, 2. Porosity, and 3.
Saturation. The additional 7 curves (rows 4 - 10) are user-defined options and can be any

422 | P a g e
curve the user selects as an input. For example, a Density curve might be used. The Cut-
off Name column allows the user to type in a text string which describes the curve being
used as a cut-off. The names are used as log track titles in the Cut-off and Summation
Interactive log plot.

If the Use column is checked next to a curve then zonal average values for the checked
curve will be computed and presented in the output report, whether or not the checked
row is used as a cut-off. This gives the user the flexibility to experiment with the number
and type of curves used in the Summation calculation and the number of curve averages
reported in the output file or printed report.

The Input curve drop box column allows the user to choose an appropriate curve
name. When the user selects either the Run or Apply button and the summation
calculation is performed, the Curve name is used to populate the column headers in the
Cut-off and Summation Parameters Screens.

In addition, when the user creates an output report to file or printer, the input curve are
used as column headers in the report.

The Curve Type column allows the user to set a Type for the input Clay Volume curves,
Porosity and Water Saturation. In effect, setting a Curve Type applies a pre-processing
routine to the input curves. The Curve Types perform the following operations.

1. Vcl - clip the input curve to values between zero and one. This allows the user,
for example, to select a clay volume from Neutron-Density curve as the input. The
program will clip the curve values to lie between zero and one before the
summation calculations is performed.
2. PHIE - clip the input curve to values greater than zero.
3. Sw - clip the input curve to values between zero and one. Also, this Type tells the
program to compute a porosity-weighted average for the input curve when

423 | P a g e
computing zonal averages.

The Input Curve column allows the user to select the curves to be used in the
Summation Report, either as curves for defining the cut-off criteria or as curves for which
average values, by zone, are required.

The Cut-off Type column allows the user to set the sign of the cut-off type if a curve is
to be used as a cut-off criterion. Options are selected from a drop-down list.

The Reservoir, Pay column allows the user to check / uncheck options in the grid to
modify the summation computation criteria.

Parameters Tab

The Parameter is used to name the file where the Cutoff parameters will be stored after
an interpretation is finished.

424 | P a g e
Zone: The number of zone

Zone name: The zone name will be followed Zoneset and user cannot change this name
manually.

Zone Top, Bottom: is the starting and ending depth of the zone.

Min Res Height: Allows the user to set the minimum thickness of a zone in order for it
to count as net reservoir. Default is 0. (All depth intervals will count towards net if they
meet the cut-off criteria).

Min Pay Height: Allows the user to set the minimum thickness of a zone in order for it
to count as Net Pay. Default is 0. (All depth intervals will count towards pay if they meet
the cut-off criteria).

Vclay Cut Res/Pay: Clay volume cut-off value. If the input clay volume curve is less
than or equal to this value, then the level can be considered for pay or reservoir if the
level also meets all the other cut-offs.

Phi Cut Res/Pay: Porosity cut-off value. If the input porosity curve value is greater than
or equal to this value, then the level can be considered for Pay or Reservoir if the level
also meets all the other cut-offs.

Sw Cut Res/Pay: Water saturation cut-off value. If the input water saturation curve is
less than or equal to this value, then the level can be considered for pay or reservoir if the
level also meets all the other cut-offs.

425 | P a g e
Summation Report Tab

The Reservoir Results tab allows the user to view the results of a summation calculation
for Net Reservoir - determined by the application of the Clay Volume and Porosity
optional cut-off criteria - for each defined zone.

The Reservoir Results parameters are described below:

Gross interval: Gross interval. Result parameter. Non-editable.

Net Res: Net reservoir interval. Result parameter. Non-editable.

NTG Res: Net/Gross ratio for the reservoir interval. Result parameter. Non-editable.

Av Phi Res: Average porosity in the reservoir interval. Result parameter. Non-editable.

Av Sw Res: Average water saturation in the reservoir interval. This is a porosity-

426 | P a g e
weighted average. Result parameter. Non-editable.

Av Vcl Res: Average clay volume in the reservoir interval. Result parameter. Non-
editable.

The Pay Results tab allows the user to view the results of a summation calculations for
Net Pay - determined by the application of the Clay volume, Porosity and Water
Saturation cut-off criteria - for each defined zone.

The Pay Results parameters are described below:

Gross Interval: Gross interval. Result parameter. Non-editable.

Net Pay: Net pay interval. Result parameter. Non-editable.

NTG Pay: Net/Gross ratio for the pay interval. Result parameter. Non-editable.

Av Phi Pay: Average porosity in the pay interval. Result parameter. Non-editable.

Av Sw Pay: Average water saturation in the pay interval. This is a porosity-weighted


average. Result parameter. Non-editable.

Av Vcl Pay: Average clay volume in the pay interval. Result parameter. Non-editable.

Equations

Average Clay volume

∑𝑖=𝑛
𝑖=1 𝑉𝑐𝑙𝑖 ∗ ℎ𝑖
𝑉𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑣 =
∑𝑖=𝑛
𝑖=1 ℎ𝑖

Average Porosity

427 | P a g e
∑𝑖=𝑛
𝑖=1 𝛷𝑖 ∗ ℎ𝑖
𝛷𝑎𝑣 =
∑𝑖=𝑛
𝑖=1 ℎ𝑖

Average Water saturation

∑𝑖=𝑛
𝑖=1 𝛷𝑖 ∗ ℎ𝑖 ∗ (1 − 𝑆𝑤 )
𝑆𝑎𝑣 = 1 −
∑𝑖=𝑛
𝑖=1 𝛷𝑖 ∗ ℎ𝑖

Where

i: ith input value

hi : ith input interval

n: number of samples

Output

Dataset drop box: Location to save the results curve

The Net Flag displays the Flag curve names for each active / selected report

Net flag Reservoir drop box: The name of the reservoir flag. User can change this name
manually.

Net flag Pay drop box: The name of the Pay flag. User can change this name manually.

428 | P a g e
Run button: will execute the summation calculations and will offer the user the option to
launch the Cut-off and Summation interactive log plot. NOTE: once the Run button has
been used, the default settings for cut-off values can no longer be edited on the second
set-up tab. Any further modifications must be made in the Cut-off and Summation
Parameters window.

Apply button: allows the user, after the Run button has been used once, to modify the
Input curves screen, for example to modify the optional curve selection for which to
calculate zonal averages.

Make plot button: allows the user to make plot of cutoff after run.

Zone manger: allows the user to manage their zone to change some information such as
name of the zone...

Export Report: allows the user to export the report to *.CSV, *.txt, pdf , *.xsl file,....

Close: allows the user to close the cutoff and Summation form.

429 | P a g e
Part X: Capillary Pressure Modeling
Introduction

The “Capillary Pressure Modeling” feature, is designed for Well Insight users to create
saturation height functions from capillary pressure data.

With an intuitive and specialized loader tool, capillary pressure data from core analysis
such as water saturation, porosity, permeability can be loaded in to module with ease.

The module supports multi-wells array data processing, with corrections for laboratory
data and reservoir conditions. Furthermore, with flexible sample grouping, multiple
saturation height functions can be derived.

The module is designed as a complete workflow and a step by step guide assists users to
complete their job. Moreover, in a single project, the user can create several workflows
and all parameters will be saved separately and automatically.

430 | P a g e
Chapter 16: Capillary Pressure Modeling
The workflow for Capillary Pressure Modeling in Well-InsightTM includes:

1. Create New Pc workflow


2. Input Settings
3. Data Loader
4. Data Correction and Transformation
5. Build Pc models
 J Leverret Model
 J Leverret Modified Model
 Corey Brooks Model
 Thomeer Model
6. Saturation Height

431 | P a g e
Create New Capillary Pressure Workflow
In order to create a new Capillary Pressure workflow in Well Insight™, the user can right
click on “Capillary Pressure Workflows” on the data tree, Select “New Pc workflow”
on the pop-up menu. Then type the name of new workflow and click OK to finish.

432 | P a g e
Input Settings
This is the 1st step of the workflow, where the user can select their input curves for
further step. If their data is not available in the project, user can use the “Data Loader”
form to load data into the working project.

Users are allowed to input curves from multiple wells to use in each workflow.

After finishing settings for input curves, user must click “Apply” to save settings and are
then ready to move to next step in workflow.

433 | P a g e
Data Loader
Well-Insight™ provides the user a specialized tool to load capillary pressure data into
their project. In this form, the user is allowed to copy and paste data onto the grid. Then,
set the name of curves and dataset to which the data will be loaded.

To open “Data Loader” form, User can click on “Data Loader” button in Input
Settings form.

The SCAL data format and unit should be prepared prior to loading into Well-Insight™
and is illustrated as the table below:

Please note that in this module, units of data should be converted before loading into the
software:

o Capillary pressure (Bar) o Permeability (mD)


o Water Saturation (v/v)
o Porosity (v/v)
434 | P a g e
435

User can easily highlight and copy data from excel and then paste to the Pc data grid
by Ctrl + V, or click on paste button ( ). If the user wants to delete data on
the grid to copy another one, they can click on the “Clear” button ( ).

After user pastes data onto the grid, they can select the well that each sample belongs
to. In order to do this job with ease and functionality, the user can right-click on
selected well and select “Fill Up” or “Fill Down” to copy the settings up and down
for multiple samples.

The “Data Loader” tool in Well-Insight ™ allows the user to load data into multiple
wells at the same time. After finishing copy/paste data, selecting the well for the
sample, the user can go to “Output” section to name their dataset and curves or just
keep them as a default setting.

Click “Load” to load data into the working project. When the user has loaded their
data into project, they can use “Input settings” form to input curves.

435 | P a g e
436

Data Correction and Transformation


Well-Insight™ provides the user several correction methods (e.g. stress correction
and clay bound water correction) to enhance their data quality.

To do data correction, check on the correction method and input the related
parameters.

 For Stress correction, user has to input the ratio between PhiRes/PhiLab,
default value is 0.95

𝑟𝑒𝑠
𝑃𝑐𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠_𝑐𝑜𝑟𝑟 = 𝑃𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑏√
𝑙𝑎𝑏

𝑟𝑒𝑠
𝑆𝑤𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠_𝑐𝑜𝑟𝑟 = 1 − (1 − 𝑆𝑤𝑙𝑎𝑏) ∗
𝑙𝑎𝑏

 For Clay bound water correction, user has to input value for Salinity and also
Qv curve

𝑃𝑐𝑐𝑏𝑐𝑜𝑟𝑟 = 𝑃𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑏√𝐴

𝑆𝑤𝑐𝑏𝑐𝑜𝑟𝑟 = 1 − (1 − 𝑆𝑤𝑙𝑎𝑏) ∗ 𝐴

Where:

𝐴 = 1 − (0.22 + 0.6425 ∗ 𝑆𝑎𝑙𝑖𝑛𝑖𝑡𝑦 −0.5 ) ∗ 𝑄𝑣

436 | P a g e
437

In the case that all correction methods are checked, the calculation order will be stress
correction then clay bound water correction. To convert pressure values from
laboratory condition to reservoir condition, user input values of
𝜎 ∗ 𝐶𝑜𝑠𝜃 then check in “convert to reservoir”.

𝑃𝑐 ∗ 𝜎_𝑟𝑒𝑠 ∗ 𝐶𝑜𝑠𝜃_𝑟𝑒𝑠
𝑃𝑐𝑅𝑒𝑠 =
𝜎_𝑙𝑎𝑏 ∗ 𝐶𝑜𝑠𝜃_𝑙𝑎𝑏

System *Cos
Laboratory
Air – Brine 72
Air – Mercury 367.2
Air – Oil 24
Oil - Brine 42.568
Reservoir
Brine – Oil 26.98
Brine – Gas 50

437 | P a g e
438

Well-Insight™ supports users to input their custom values, as well as default value of
fluid system.

After finishing settings for all wells, the user can input suffix to name the corrected Pc
and Sw curves as well as reservoir Pc curves output. If the user wants to revert every
parameter to default values, click on “Default” button.

Click Apply to save settings and Run to produce the output curves. Click on “View
Data” to view original, corrected and reservoir outputs.

438 | P a g e
439

Build Capillary Pressure Models


When all data is ready, move to this step to build capillary pressure model. Well-
Insight™ supports the user to build their models base on several methods:

 J Leverett Model
 J Leverett Modified Model
 Corey-Brooks Model
 Thomeer Model

To create a new model, right click on “Build Pc model”, select “Add new model”
and choose the method wanted to build, enter name for the model and click OK.

The new created model named “J Leverett Model” is created and list under “Build
Pc model”. User double-click to open it.

439 | P a g e
440

440 | P a g e
441

J Leverett Model
Double click to open “J Leverett Model”. The settings are illustrated below:

Header:

o Model: the name of working model


o Method: the method being used.
o Equation: equation of the method being used.
o Regression: user select regression method that they want to use. Well-
Insight™ supports 3 Regression methods: Lambda, Hyperbola,
Exponential.

Select Samples:

o Well Name: selected well


o Dataset: select dataset
o Select: user can select or deselect samples that are used to build model.
o Sample ID, Depth, Porosity, Permeability, RQI: information of
samples, user can sort, filter, by right click on each column.

441 | P a g e
442

o Group: by default, all the samples are belonged to group name


“Untitled”. User can enter name for grouping samples into several
groups.

Calculation Equations:

𝑃𝑐 𝐾
𝐽 = 3.1415 ∗ √( )
𝜎 ∗ 𝐶𝑜𝑠𝜃 𝜙

Where:

Pc: Capillary pressure at reservoir condition (Bar)

K: Core permeability (mD)

𝝓: Core porosity (v/v)

𝝈: Interfacial tension (dyne/cm)

𝜽: Contact angle (deg)

3.1415: Unit conversion ratio

J: J function (unitless)

With regression equations as below:

o Lambda:
𝑆𝑤 = 𝑎 ∗ 𝐽(−𝜆) + 𝑏
o Hyperbola:
𝑆𝑤 = 𝑎/(𝐽 − 𝜆) + 𝑏
o Exponential:
𝑆𝑤 = 𝑎 ∗ 𝑒 𝜆.𝐽 + 𝑏

After finishing selecting samples and grouping, click apply then run to perform the
fitting process. The result of each group is show in the grid “Result”

Result:

442 | P a g e
443

o Header row: names of fitting parameters.


o Group: each row is the result of a group.
o Use: in each parameter, user can select which values should be put in
the final result.
 Result: result from the fitting process
 Fix value: the value that user enter to force fit the function.
o R2: correlation coefficient
o Result Equation: the final equation in J Leverett using model.

Output Curves:

o Sw regression: name of saturation regression curve.


o J: name of J Leverette curve.
o Suffix: add suffix to name of output curves to distinguish between
models.

Buttons:

o Output Curve: produce the regression curves.


o Report: show the report of working model.
o Show crossplot: user click to show crossplot. There are 2 types of
crossplot can be show:
 Sw measure vs J: show the relationship between saturation with
J, the regression equation lines for each group are showed on this
crossplot.
 Sw measure vs Sw regression: show the relation between raw
data and regression.

Crossplot:

443 | P a g e
444

Well-Insight™ supports users to create as many models as they want. All models and
equations of groups are saved automatically on the working workflow, after building a
good model. User can then move to next step to calculate saturation curves for their
interest zones, by using established equations.

444 | P a g e
445

J Leverett Modified Model


Double click to open “J Leverett Modified Model”. The settings are illustrated
below:

Header:

o Model: the name of working model


o Method: the method being used.
o Equation: equation of the method being used.
o Porosity Modifier (m): The software provides the default value is 2.
o Regression: user select regression method that they want to use. Well-
Insight™ supports 3 Regression methods: Lambda, Hyperbola,
Exponential.

Select Samples:

o Well Name: selected well


o Dataset: select dataset
o Select: user can select or deselect samples that are used to build model.

445 | P a g e
446

o Sample ID, Depth, Porosity, Permeability, RQI: information of


samples, user can sort, filter, by right click on each column.
o Group: by default, all the samples are belonged to group name
“Untitled”. User can enter name for grouping samples into several
groups.

Calculation Equations:

𝑃𝑐 𝐾
𝐽 = 3.1415 ∗ √( 𝑚 )
𝜎 ∗ 𝐶𝑜𝑠𝜃 𝜙

Where:

Pc: Capillary pressure at reservoir condition (Bar)

K: Core permeability (mD)

𝝓: Core porosity (v/v)

𝝈: Interfacial tension (dyne/cm)

𝜽: Contact angle (deg)

m: Porosity modifier

3.1415: Unit conversion ratio

J: J function (unitless)

With regression equations as below:

o Lambda:
𝑆𝑤 = 𝑎 ∗ 𝐽(−𝜆) + 𝑏
o Hyperbola:
𝑆𝑤 = 𝑎/(𝐽 − 𝜆) + 𝑏
o Exponential:
𝑆𝑤 = 𝑎 ∗ 𝑒 𝜆.𝐽 + 𝑏

446 | P a g e
447

After finishing selecting samples and grouping, click apply then run to perform the
fitting process. The result of each group is show in the grid “Result”

Result:

o Header row: names of fitting parameters.


o Group: each row is the result of a group.
o Use: in each parameter, user can select which values should be put in
the final result.
 Result: result from the fitting process
 Fix value: the value that user enter to force fit the function.
o R2: correlation coefficient
o Result Equation: the final equation in J Leverett Modified using model.

Output Curves:

o Sw regression: name of saturation regression curve.


o J: name of J Leverette Modified curve.
o Suffix: add suffix to name of output curves to distinguish between
models.

Buttons:

o Output Curve: produce the regression curves.


o Report: show the report of working model.
o Show crossplot: user click to show crossplot. There are 2 types of
crossplot can be show:
 Sw measure vs J: show the relationship between saturation with
J, the regression equation lines for each group are showed on this
crossplot.
 Sw measure vs Sw regression: show the relation between raw
data and regression.

Crossplot:

447 | P a g e
448

Well-Insight™ supports users to create as many models as they want. All models and
equations of groups are saved automatically on the working workflow, after building a
good model. User can then move to next step to calculate saturation curves for their
interest zones, by using established equations.

448 | P a g e
449

Corey-Brooks Model
Double click to open “Corey-Brooks Model”. The settings are illustrated below:

Header:

o Model: the name of working model


o Method: the method being used.
o Equation: equation of the method being used.

Select Samples:

o Well Name: selected well


o Dataset: select dataset
o Select: user can select or deselect samples that are used to build model.
o Sample ID, Depth, Porosity, Permeability, RQI: information of
samples, user can sort, filter, by right click on each column.
o Group: by default, all the samples are belonged to group name
“Untitled”. User can enter name for grouping samples into several
groups.

449 | P a g e
450

Calculation Equations:

𝑃𝑐𝑒 1
𝑆𝑤 = 𝑆𝑤𝑖 + (1 − 𝑆𝑤𝑖) ∗ ( )𝑁
𝑃𝑐

After finishing selecting samples and grouping, click apply then run to perform the
fitting process. The result of each group is show in the grid “Result”

Result:

o Header row: names of fitting parameters.


o Group: each row is the result of a group.
o Use: in each parameter, user can select which values should be put in
the final result.
 Result: result from the fitting process
 Fix value: the value that user enter to force fit the function.
 Equation: the correlation equation that selected
o R2: correlation coefficient
o Combined Equation: the final equation Corey-Brooks using models.
o Correlation: After fitting/regression between Pc and Sw, user can do
correlation regression of fitting parameters (Swi, Pce, N) and core inputs
(pore, perm, RQI) by using this option. There are 4 Correlation
Regressions:
 Linear: P = C1 + C2*Input
 Logarithmic: P = C1 + C2*Log10(Input)
 Power: P = C1*Pow(Input, C2)
 Exponential: P = Pow10(C1 + C2*Input)

Where:

 P: fitting parameter
 Input: core inputs (Porosity, Permeability, RQI)
 C1, C2: regression coefficients

450 | P a g e
451

Output Curves:

o Sw regression: name of saturation regression curve.


o Pc regression: name of capillary pressure regression curves.
o Suffix: add suffix to name of output curves to distinguish between
models.

Buttons:

o Output Curve: produce the regression curves.


o Report: show the report of working model.
o Show crossplot: user click to show crossplot. There are 3 types of
crossplot can be show:
 Sw measure vs Sw regression: show the relation between raw
data and regression.
 Pc reservoir vs Pc regression: show the relation between raw
data and regression.
 Sw measure vs Pc reservoir: show the relationship between
saturation with Pc, the regression equation lines for each group
are showed on this crossplot.

Crossplot:

451 | P a g e
452

Well-Insight™ supports users to create as many models as they want. All models and
equations of groups are saved automatically on the working workflow, after building a
good model. User can then move to next step to calculate saturation curves for their
interest zones, by using established equations.

452 | P a g e
453

Thomeer Model
Double click to open “Thomeer Model”. The settings are illustrated below:

Header:

o Model: the name of working model


o Method: the method being used.
o Equation: equation of the method being used.

Select Samples:

o Well Name: selected well


o Dataset: select dataset
o Select: user can select or deselect samples that are used to build model.
o Sample ID, Depth, Porosity, Permeability, RQI: information of
samples, user can sort, filter, by right click on each column.
o Group: by default, all the samples are belonged to group name
“Untitled”. User can enter name for grouping samples into several
groups.

453 | P a g e
454

Calculation Equations:

𝑆𝑏∞ −𝐺
𝑆𝑤 = 1 − ( ) ∗ 𝑒^
𝜙 𝑃𝑐
𝑙𝑜𝑔10
𝑃𝑑

After finishing selecting samples and grouping, click apply then run to perform the
fitting process. The result of each group is show in the grid “Result”

Result:

o Header row: names of fitting parameters.


o Group: each row is the result of a group.
o Use: in each parameter, user can select which values should be put in
the final result.
 Result: result from the fitting process
 Fix value: the value that user enter to force fit the function.
 Equation: the correlation equation that selected
o R2: correlation coefficient
o Combined Equation: the final equation Thomeer using models.
o Correlation: After fitting/regression between Pc and Sw, user can do
correlation regression of fitting parameters (Sbinf, G, Pd) and core
inputs (pore, perm, RQI) by using this option. There are 4 Correlation
Regressions:
 Linear: P = C1 + C2*Input
 Logarithmic: P = C1 + C2*Log10(Input)
 Power: P = C1*Pow(Input, C2)
 Exponential: P = Pow10(C1 + C2*Input)

Where:

 P: fitting parameter
 Input: core inputs (Porosity, Permeability, RQI)
 C1, C2: regression coefficients

454 | P a g e
455

Output Curves:

o Sw regression: name of saturation regression curve.


o Pc regression: name of capillary pressure regression curves.
o Suffix: add suffix to name of output curves to distinguish between
models.

Buttons:

o Output Curve: produce the regression curves.


o Report: show the report of working model.
o Show crossplot: user click to show crossplot. There are 3 types of
crossplot can be show:
 Sw measure vs Sw regression: show the relation between raw
data and regression.
 Pc reservoir vs Pc regression: show the relation between raw
data and regression.
 Sw measure vs Pc reservoir: show the relationship between
saturation with Pc, the regression equation lines for each group
are showed on this crossplot.

Crossplot:

455 | P a g e
456

Well-Insight™ supports users to create as many models as they want. All models and
equations of groups are saved automatically on the working workflow, after building a
good model. User can then move to next step to calculate saturation curves for their
interest zones, by using established equations.

456 | P a g e
457

Saturation Height Modeling


The “Saturation Height Modeling” is used to take the functions that have been
developed in the “Capillary Pressure Model” to apply these functions to multiple
wells and multiple reservoir zones.

Similar to build a “Pc model”, to create a Saturation height model, users right-click
on “Saturation Height Modeling” and select “Add New”, fill in the name for
Saturation Height and click “Ok”.

New created Saturation Height model is listed below “Saturation Height Modeling”.

Open Saturation Height model by click on it on the workflow tree.

457 | P a g e
458

Inputs:

o Well: select well to do the calculation.


o Zoneset: select zoneset for calculation.
o TVDSS: select input curve for sub-sea TVD.
o Permeability: select input curve for permeability.
o Porosity: select input curve for porosity.
o Log Saturation: select log derived saturation. This curve is for
comparison, not for calculation.

Parameters:

o Fluid Parameter: user select Density or Gradient depends on the


available data.
o Zone: all zones in selected zoneset will be listed down.
o Use: user check to do the calculation for these zones.
o Top and Bottom: Top depth and Bottom depth following with the
TVDSS depth reference input.
o FWL: user input depth of FWL, FWL depth > Top of each zone.
o HC density/Water density: user input for densities of fluids (g/cc)
when Density mode is selected on Fluid Parameter.

458 | P a g e
459

o HC gradient/Water gradient: user input for gradients of fluids (psi/ft)


when Gradient mode is selected on Fluid Parameter.
o *Cos: value of interfacial tension and contact angle of reservoir fluid.
The default value is inherited from “correction and transform” step.
o Model: user select the built model that want to use to apply for
saturation estimation.
o Group/Function: user select a function of a group for each zone, all
function of selected model will be listed down.
o Equation: equation of selected function will be showed.

Calculation Equations:

o HAFWL = FWL(TVDSS) – Depth(TVDSS)

Where:

 HAFWL: Height Above Free Water Level (m)


 FWL: Free Water Level

o Pc = 0.01 ∗ HAFWL ∗ g ∗ (w − hc)

Where:

 Pc: Capillary Pressure (bar)


 g: Gravitational Acceleration (9.81 g/cm3)
 w: Water Density (g/cc)
 hc: Hydrocarbon Density (g/cc)

Discriminators:

Beside selecting function in Parameter section, user can also use logical condition
to control their calculation.

o Use: user check to use discriminator for these zones.

459 | P a g e
460

o Zone: all selected zone on “Parameter” section will be available to


select.
o Curve: select curve to put in the discriminator.
o Condition: select logical condition (e.g. >, >=, =, <, <=)
o Curve value: select curve or input a value to complete the
discriminator.
o Group/Function: select a function, if the condition returns right,
selected function will be used, else the program will use default function
which is selected in “parameter” section.

Outputs:

o Dataset: select the dataset to save output curves.


o Sw: name of saturation curve.
o Height Above FWL: name of height curve.

Buttons:

460 | P a g e
461

o Show Logplot: click this button to view the logplot. This logplot
template will overlay log derive saturation and saturation from
saturation height function for comparison
o Save, Load settings: save settings on form to use in further calculation
o Clear settings: clear all the settings on form
o Apply: save settings
o Run: perform calculation

461 | P a g e

You might also like